FCB Conactor

Modular contactors
Contents
Introduction ……………………………………………………….3 CBA 57 – CBPA 57 B 150A 39 39

CBA 55 – CBPA 55 200A 40 40
Generalities on bar contactor’s main uses 3 CBA 57 – CBPA 57 B 200A 41 41
Use under direct current 3
Use under alternating current 5 CB 75 400 to 1000A ………………………………………. …..43
Definition of normalized duty cycles 7
Three-phase 50/60 Hz outputs 8 Technical features:
CBA 75 400 to 1000A 44 44
Applications………………………………………………. ….…9 CBFC 75 400 to 1000A 45 45
Overall dimensions:
“Direct” start-up and co-ordination 9 CBA&CBFC 75 400 to 1000A, 1000Vac&500Vdc 46 46
“Star-Delta” start-up 12-13 12 CBA&CBFC 75 400, 1000Vac&500Vdc 47 47
“Start-up” by auto-transformers 14-15 14 CBA&CBFC 75 500 &630A, 1000Vac&500Vdc 48 48
How to select contactors for rotary circuits 16 16 CBA&CBFC 75 800&1000A, 1000Vac&500Vdc 49 49
How to select CBA contactors for battery capacitors 18 CBFC 75 400 to 1000A 2.0, 1000Vac-dc 50 50
How to select contactors for heating circuits 19 CBFC 75 400 to 1000A 3.0, 1000Vac-dc 51 51
CBFC 75 400 to 1000A 4.0, 1000Vac-dc 52 52
Description of contactor’s components………………. …..21 CBFC 75 400 to 1000A 2.1, 1000Vac-dc 53 53
CBFC 75 400 to 1000A 3.1, 1000Vac-dc 54 54
Frame 21
Electromagnet 21 CB 71 1250 to 2000A …………………………………….. …..55
Main poles 22
Auxiliary contacts 23 Technical features:
Mechanical locking between two contactors 23 CBA 71 1250 to 2000A 56 56
Locking by “RONIS” type lock 23 CBC 1250 to 2000A 57 57
Mechanical latching with electrical release 24 Overall dimensions:
CBA& CBC 71 1250 to 2000A, 1000Vac&600Vac-dc 58
Auxiliary contacts …….………………………………….. …..25 CBC 1250 to 2000A, 1000Vac-dc 59-60 59
M type instant contacts 26 26 CB 2500 to 5000 A and more …………………………………61

Dimensions 26 26
Operating diagram for different versions of M type instan Technical features:
contacts 27 CBA – CBC 2500 to 6200A 62 62
D type instant contacts 28 28 CBA - CBC 98 2560 to 5000 A 63 63
TP 86 type delayed contacts 28 28 Overall dimensions:
CBA – CBC 2500 to 6200A 64 64
CBC 80 to 630A, single-pole versions………………… …..29 CBA – CBC 2500 to 6200A 65 65
CBC 54 3000A, 1000Vac-dc 66-67 66
Technical features: CBC 60 5000A, 1000Vac-dc 68-69 68
CBC 80 to 200A – RUBC 400 to 630A 29 CBC 98 2560 and 3200 70-73 70
Overall dimensions: CBC 98 5000 74-75 74
CBC 80 to 200A 31 31
CBC - RUBC 400 to 630A 32 32 Field circuit breakers (excitation contactors) from
80 to 6200A………………………………………………..……75
CB 80 to 200A, multipolar version ……………………. …..33
Technical features 77
Technical features: Overall dimensions:
CBA 55 – CBPA 57 80 to 200A 34 34 CEX 57 80 To 200A 1.1, 500Vdc 79
CBC 57 B – CBFC 55 80 to 200A 35 35 CEX 57 80 To 200A 2.1, 500Vdc 80
Overall dimensions: CEX 75 400 To 1000A, 500Vdc 81
CBA 55 – CBPA 55 80A 36 36 CEX 75 400 To 1000A 1.1, 500Vdc 82
CBA 57 – CBPA 57 B 80A 37 37 CEX 75 400 To 1000A 2.1, 500Vdc 83
CBA 55 – CBPA 55 150A 38 38 CEX 75 400 To 1000A 3.1, 1000Vdc 84
CEX 71 1250 To 2000A, 600Vdc 85 Magnetic RBC 1054 Z relays ………………………….. ….136
CEX 71 1250 To 2000A 3.1, 1000Vdc 86
CEX 54 3000 To 60 5000A 2.2, 600Vdc 87 Technical features 137
CEX 54 3000 To 60 5000A 2.1, 600Vdc 88 Operation 138
CEX 54 3000A 3.1, 1000Vdc 89 Overall dimensions 139
CEX 3000 to 5000A bipolar, 1500 Vdc 90 Overall dimensions for 900 to5000 A current-triggered 140
CEX 3000 to 5000A four-poles, 1500 Vdc 92 relays
CEX 98 2560-3200A 1.1, 600 Vdc 92
CEX 98 2560-3200A 1.1, 1000 Vdc 92 CIC 1 - 2 DC contactors ………………………………… ….141
CEX 98 2560-3200A 2.1, 1000 Vdc 93 Technical features 142
CEX 98 2560-3200A 2.1, 1500 Vdc 94 Overall dimensions 143
CEX 98 2560-3200A 4.1, 2000 Vdc 95
CEX 98 5000A 1.1, 600 Vdc 96 Connection drawings …………………………………… …144
CEX 98 5000A 1.1,1000 Vdc 97
CEX 98 5000A 2.1, 1000 Vdc 98 How to select your connection drawing 152 144
CEX 98 5000A 3.1,1000 Vdc 99 Control circuit of contactors without mechanical latching 145
CEX 98 5000A 4.1, 1000 Vdc 100 with electrical release
Control circuit of contactors with mechanical latching:
DRAW-OUT EXCITATION CONTACTORS…………….. …101 with single electrical release 146
with single electrical release (§1) 155 147
CMA 98 1250 to 5500 A ………………………………………102 with single electrical release (§2) 156 148
with single electrical release (§3) 157 149
Technical features: with double electrical release 158 150
CMA 98 1250 to 2000 A 108 with double electrical release (§1) 159 151
CMA 98 2560 to 5500 A 109 with double electrical release (§2) 160 152
Overall dimensions: with double electrical release (§3) 161 153
CMA 98 1250 - 1600 - 2000 3.0 110 with double electrical release (§4) 162 154
CMA 98 1250 - 1600 - 2000 2.0 111 with double electrical release (§5) 163 155
CMA 98 1250 - 1600 - 2000 6.0 112
CMA 98 1250 - 1600 - 2000 3.0 113 Legends ………………………………………………….… …156
CMA 98 2560 2.0 - 3200 2.0 114
CMA 98 2560 - 3000 1.0 115
CMA 98 2560 - 3000 2.0 116
CMA 98 5000 - 5500 1.0 117
CMA 98 5000 - 5500 2.0 118
CMA 98 5000(1) + 2 x 1250(2) 119
Vertical mechanical locking ……………………………. …120
80 to 200 A range 120

400 to 1000 A range 120
1250 to 5000 A range 121
2500 to 5000 A range 121
CBT rapid contactors ……………………………………. …122
Technical features CBT 200 - 400 - 800 123

Co-ordination of thyristor‘s protections 124
Operation and graphic method 125
CBT 200 A - Definition of KL according to Kcc and τ 129
CBT 200 A - Definition of K according to Kcc and τ 130
CBT 400 to 800 A- Definition of KL according to Kcc 131
and τ
Overall dimensions CBT 200 to 800 A 134
Control circuit drawings 135
Introduction
Generaliti es on bar contactor‘s main uses

Thanks to their modular constitution, bar contactors from - delayed on opening or on closing of the contactor.
80 to 6200 A can meet most of your requirements that ■ to obtain a reinforced level of insulation by increasing the
block contactors, although easy to mount, can not meet. distance between the poles (for high rotary voltages, for
dusty or conductive atmosphere).
It is possible on a bar contactor to:
■ to mount on the contactor a mechanical latching with
■ mount one or several poles of different or similar calibres, single or double electrical release, with or without self-
- of different currents (AC and DC), protective device for the release coil(s).
- of different types: closing poles or opening poles (rup-
turing poles), ■ to lock mechanically the contactor with one or several
- with or without mechanical overlapping, contactors of similar or different calibres in a vertical, hori-
- with or without magnetic blow-out. zontal or «back to back» position.
■ to mount a significant number of auxiliary contacts of dif- ■ to adapt the fixation centre-to-centre distance to the
ferent types, mounting conditions.
- instant, opening or closing, with or without overlap-
ping, without blow-out or with magnetic blow-out Below are shown a few examples of characteristic uses
(for DC inductive control circuits), and possibilities of our bar contactors.
Use under direct current

Electrochemistry - Galvanoplasty Handling - Heavy lifting
- voltage from 6 to 220 Vdc - voltage from 220 to 550 Vdc

- current from 1250 to 8000 A - current from 80 to 2000 A
The contactors with or without blow-out are designed Single-pole or two-pole contactors are designed for the
for the supply, coupling in series, in parallel or complex control, the reversion of motor running direction and to
coupling, for the sectioning of electrolysis vats, and for short-circuit the acceleration and braking resistance
the reversion of the supply polarities. catches.
Type of contactors adapted to these applications: Type of contactors adapted to these applications:
- CBC 71 - 1250 - 1600 - 2000 A,
- CBC 54 - 2500 - 3000 A, ■ Single-pole contactors:
- CBC 60 - 4000 - 5000 - 6200 A. - CBC 57 80 & 150, CBC 68 200, CBC 96 400 (replac-
ing the CBC 45 320 & CBC 75 320),
- one-pole rupturing contactors RUBC 57 B 80 - 150 -
200, RUBC 96 400 (for brake shoe).
■ Two-pole contactors:
- CBC 57 B 80 - 150 - 200 A,
- CBFC 75 400 to 1000 A,
- CBC 71 1250 to 2000 A.
3
Introduction
Mining industries Power generation
- voltages from 110 to 1200 Vdc Excitation and desexcitation of power inductors up to
- current from 80 to 9000 A 900 MW and more.
Our single-pole or multipolar contactors are designed for - voltage from 110 to 1200 Vdc
motor control, rolling mills accessories, «blooming», wire - current from 80 to 6200 A
trains, etc...
Our CEX contactors are used by a significant number of
CBC and CBFC contactors have been designed for such French and foreign alternator manufacturers. They are
intensive duty cycles. made up of 1, 2 or 3 magnetic arc-blow-out poles and of
1 opening pole called a «rupturing pole».
Rapid contactors (release < 10 ms) are indicaded for the
thyristor‘s bridges and their related fuses protection, On opening, the rupturing pole closes before the main
should the network voltage disappears. poles open.
Type of contactors adapted to those applications:

- CBT 75 300 - 500 - 1000
C1
Operating diagram: Ext
Rd
C1: excitation contactor.

Detector
Rd: discharge resistor.
Ext: inductor.
Shunt
Traction networks, railways, undergrounds, and

L M
trolley buses
Extra self-inductive coil CBT
- voltages of 500 - 600 - 750 Vdc

- current from 25 to 6000 A
Uninterrupted Power Supply Contactors can be used for supplying and splitting up the
tracks into sections, for supplying the sectioning cou-
- voltage from 110 to 550 Vdc pons, sectioning and putting to earth the rails in the
- current from 80 to 1000 A repairing workshops, coupling and insulating the tracks.
DC entry contactors for the supply of UPSunits. Type of contactors adapted to those applications:
- all our DC contactors, with reinforced insulation or
CBC and CBFC contactors have been used and are still double insulation according to the nominal operating
used for that application since the development of UPS‘s. voltage.
You will find our contactors in the undergrounds of

Mexico, Cairo, Athens, Santiago, Montreal, Paris,Lyon,
Marseille, etc… This range is completed by switches with
«manual or electrical» energy storage control.
CIT
CCP
ST ST
plat- Section II track I

form I sectioning CCP
coupons
platform II Section II track II
CIT-CCP: contactors.
ST: sectioning equipments.
4
Introduction
Protection of equipments supplied Our RBC 1054 relays equipped with contacts, with or
with DC current without magnetic arc-blow-out, with currents ranging
from 2 to 40 A can be:
- voltage up to 600 Vdc and more - instant voltage-triggered or delayed on opening,
- current from 2 to 10000 A - instant direct current-triggered from 1 to 10000 A or
magnetically delayed on opening,
It is necessary to check and control voltages, currents and - reverse-current relays,
the current‘s crossing direction, to delay or not the effects - synchronising relays for the start-up of synchronous
produced by variations in basic features. motors,
- regenerative braking control relays with rectifier for slip
ring motors.
Use under alternating current

Heavy industries ■ Contactor with magnetic blow-out
- rotary voltage � 600 V, parallel connection
- voltage from 110 to 1000 V • two-pole contactor, I passing = I rotor
- current from 80 to 4000 A (contactor with standard insulation)
• three-pole contactor, I passing = I rotor / 1.5
■ Generally used for distribution, in association with high (contactor with standard insulation)
switch-off rating fuses in case of remote control distribu- - rotary voltage between 600 and 1200 V, parallel con-
tion with quite frequent operations. nection subject to the fact that the voltage between
fixed and moving contacts of each pole does not
■ High speed motor control up to 1200 V, either with direct exceed 800 V; should it exceeds, adopt a connection
start-up or via starters with statory resistors or autotrans- in series.
formers. • two-pole contactor, connection in parallel,
I passing = I rotor
■ Short-circuit of slip-ring motor starting resistors up to (contactor with reinforced insulation)
2000 V (for greater voltages, please consult us). • three-pole contactor, connection in parallel,
I passing = I rotor / 1.5
Selection and connecting mode of contactors used in the (contactor with reinforced insulation)
rotary circuit of asynchronous motor: • three-pole contactor connection in series,
- automatic start-up without speed adjustment by varia- I passing = I rotor
tion of the rotor‘s resistance: contactor without arc- (contactor with reinforced insulation)
blow-out, - rotary voltage between 1200 and 2000 V, connection
- automaticstart-up withspeed adjustment byvariation of the in series subject to the fact that the voltage between
rotor‘s resistance: contactor with magnetic arc-blow-out. fixed and moving contacts of each pole does not
exceed 800 V.
• three-pole contactor, I passing = I rotor
Connecting mode (contactor with reinforced insulation)
■ Contactor without arc-blow-out:

- rotary voltage � 600 V, parallel connection Calibre
• two-pole contactor, I passing = I rotor
(contactor with standard insulation) ■ Short-circuiting contactor: calibrated according to the
• three-pole contactor, I passing = I rotor /1.5 rotary current.
(contactor with standard insulation)
- rotary voltage between 600 and 1200 V, parallel con- ■ Acceleration contactor
nection - automatic start-up:
• two-pole contactor, I passing = I rotor I nominal of contactors inferior or equal to I peak/6,
(contactor with reinforced insulation) - semiautomatic start-up or with adjustment catches:
• three-pole contactor, I passing = I rotor /1.5 I nominal of contactors inferior or equal to I passing,
(contactor with reinforced insulation) - for stator M-T: rotary blow-out CBA contactor (slow
- rotary voltage between 1200 and 2000 V, connection break: 200 ms at stator‘s contactor).
in series with three-pole contactor
I passing = I rotor (contactor with reinforced insu- Mining Industries
lation)
CBA contactors can meet the requirements of inductive
Electrotherm as line contactors, coupling devices for
capacitors or ovens.
5
Introduction
■ Protection of emergency generating sets

- voltage from 220 to 690 V A contactor placed at the end of the alternator coupled
- current from 80 to 2000 A with magnetic or thermomagnetic relays ensures the dis-
tribution of the spare current and the protection against
Three-pole contactors are designed for the control and the alternator overloads. The contactor current switch-off
the reversion of motors‘ running direction. rating issufficient in case of short-circuit. Thermal motors,
with their loss of speed, limit the short-circuit current
CBA contactors are adapted to these applications. value.
Service Industries ■ UPSunits

Front entry and exit of UPS.
Medical centres, banks, shopping malls, post and tele- Coupling of UPS.
communication centres, etc... Quick changeover from UPSto network supply in case of
UPSfailure, by using on the same contactor closing poles
- voltage from 48 to 690 V and overlapping opening poles.
- current from 80 to 4000 A Galvanic separation between the UPSand the network to
hinder the network interference.
These functions can be ensured with CBA contactors
delivered separately or as complete equipment «Normal-
Spare/Emergency».
Drawing 1 Drawing 2 Drawing 3
Drawing 1: two-pole contactor, parallel connection.

Drawing 2: three-pole contactor, parallel connection.
Drawing 3: three-pole contactor, series connection.
6
Introduction
Definition of normalised duty cycles

According to IEC 158-1, VDE 0660, NF 63-100, IEC 947-4
■ Duty cycles of contactors

These ones state the current values that the contactor has to make or break.
They depend on:
- the kind of receptor controlled: cage or slip-ring motor, resistors, …
- the conditions under which the closings and the openings happen: running or stalled motor, reversion of running
direction, regenerative braking.
Alternating current Direct current
Duty cycle AC_1 Duty cycle DC_1

Is applied to all the AC receivers whose power factor Concerns all the DC equipments (receivers) whose time
equals at least 0.95 (cos 'P ?: 0.95). Closing and opening constant (L/R) is inferior or equal to 1 ms.
of the current normally absorbed by the receiver without
risk of overcurrent on closing or opening. Example of Duty cycle DC_2
applications: heating and distribution systems. Cut-off of the «running motor» current.
Time constant is about 7.5 ms. On closing, the contactor
Duty cycle AC_2 makes thestarting current, about 2.5 times as high as the
Governs the start-up, regenerative braking and «step» motor nominal current on opening, the contactor cuts-
running of slip-ring motors. On closing, the contactor off the motor nominal current. The voltage at its termi-
establishes the starting current, (around 2.5 times the nals depends on the electromotive force of the motor.
motor nominal current). On opening, it has to cut-off the Opening is easy.
starting current under a voltage at least equal to the net-
work voltage. Duty cycle DC_3
Note: AC_2 duty cycle according to UTE standards corre- This category governs the start-up, regenerative braking
sponds to AC’2 according to VDC 0660. and «step» running of shunt motors.
Time constant � 2 ms.
Duty cycle AC_3 On closing, the contactor makes the starting current,
Concerns squirrel-cage motors with opening under run- around 2.5 times the motor nominal current. On open-
ning motor conditions. On closing, the contactor estab- ing, it must cut-off 2.5 times the starting current under a
lishes the starting current which is around 5 to 7 times voltage at least equal to the network voltage. The lower
the motor nominal voltage. On opening, it cuts off the is the speed of the motor, the higher is that voltage and
nominal current absorbed by the motor, at that time, the then the lower is its counter-electromotive force. Open-
voltage at the terminals of its poles is about 20 % of the ing is difficult.
network voltage.
The opening remains easy. Duty cycle DC_4
Example of use: all standard squirrel-cage motors, lifts, Control of a series motor, cut-off of «running motor»
elevators, escalators, conveyor belts, compressors, current. Time constant is about 10 ms. On closing, the
pumps, mixers, air conditioners, etc… contactor makes the starting current which is about
2.5 times the nominal current of the motor. On opening,
Duty cycle AC_4 it cuts off the third of the nominal current absorbed by
Concerns regenerative braking and step running applica- the motor at this time. The voltage at the terminals of its
tions with squirrel-cage motors. The contactor closes poles is also around 20 % of the network voltage. In that
under a peak of current that can reach a value 5 or category, the number of operations per hour can be high.
7 times as high as the motor nominal voltage. When it
opens, it cuts off the same current under a voltage all the Duty cycle DC_5
more high since the speed motor is low. This voltage can Control of a series motor, cut off of «not running» motor
be the network voltage. The opening is severe. current. This category concerns thestart-up, regenerative
Example of use: metallurgy, lifting systems, wiredrawing breaking and «step» running of series motors. Time
machines. constant � 7.5 ms. The contactor closes under a peak of
current that can reach 2.5 times the nominal current of
the motor. When it opens, it cuts off the same current
under a voltage which varies unproportionally with the
speed of the motor. This voltage can equal the network
voltage. Opening is severe.
7
Introduction
Motor currents
Nominal currents for asynchronous cage motors
Three-phase 50/60 Hz motor outputs
Voltage
Output 200/ 433/ 500/
220 V 230 V* 380 V 400 V 415 V 460 V* 575 V* 660 V 690 V 750 V
208 V 440 V 525 V
kW ch or hp A A A A A A A A A A A A A
18.5 25 70 64 68 37 35 35 32.8 34 28.5 27 21.9 20.2 18.5
22 25 84 75 80 44 42 40 39 40 33 32 25.4 24.2 22
30 40 114 103 104 60 57 55 51.5 52 45 41 54.6 33 30
37 50 138 126 130 72 69 66 64 65 55 52 42 40 36
45 60 162 150 154 85 81 80 76 77 65 62 49 46.8 42
55 75 200 182 192 105 100 100 90 96 80 77 61 58 52
75 100 270 240 248 138 131 135 125 124 105 99 82 75.7 69
90 125 330 295 312 170 162 165 146 156 129 125 98 94 85
110 150 400 356 360 205 195 200 178 180 156 144 118 113 103
132 480 425 245 233 240 215 187 140 135 123
200 520 472 480 273 222 260 236 240 207 192 152 128 136
160 560 520 300 285 280 256 220 170 165 150
250 600 300 240 200
200 680 626 370 352 340 321 281 215 203 185
220 300 770 700 720 408 388 385 353 360 310 288 235 224 204
250 350 850 800 840 460 437 425 401 420 360 336 274 253 230
280 528
315 1070 990 584 555 535 505 445 337 321 292
450 1080 540 432
355 1150 635 605 580 549 500 370 350 318
500 1200 600 480
400 1250 710 675 650 611 540 410 390 356
450 600 1440 720 576
500 1570 900 855 820 780 680 515 494 450
560 1760 1000 950 920 870 760 575 549 500
630 1980 1100 1045 1020 965 850 645 605 550
710 1260 1200 1140 1075 960 725 694 630
These values are only indicative, they are likely to vary according to the type of motor, its polarity and its manufacturer.
* Values in conformity with the NEC (National Electrical Code).
8
Applications
«Direct» start-up and co-ordination
General
The machines inserted in the supply circuit of a motor - motor start-up and stop control,
ensure different functions as scheduled in the installa- - protection against the overloads and short-circuits of
tion rules. Standards NFC 15-100. the motor and supplying circuit,
- safety cut-off or emergency stop.
T
Functions
Sectioning
Sectioning
device with
Protection against fuses
short-circuit
Control Contactor
Thermal relay
Protection against
overloads
Ie
Emergency
Ie Safety cut-off stop
overload short-circuit
currents currents
M
Motor Machine
3
Start-up and stop of the motor

This function called control is ensured by the contactor. peak of current from the start-up decreases up to a
It is imposed by the installation rules NFC 15-100 for all value corresponding to the carried load. When the con-
«operating machinery», notably the motors. These rules tactor opens, it cuts off that current under a voltage
also forbid the automatic start-up after a lack of voltage reduced by the counter electromotive force of the run-
when it is likely to be dangerous. ning motor.
Controlled by two pulse switches and equipped with an This cycle of operations, usual for a contactor, corre-
auto-supplying contact, the contactor meets these sponds to the AC_3 duty cycle as defined by the
requirements. Remote control and warning functions IEC 947-4 standards (contactors). To other operating
are also possible. modes or other types of motors correspond other duty
cycles with specific selection modes for contactors: defi-
When it closes, the contactor makes the starting current nition of duty cycles.
of the motor, that can reach 5 to 7 times its normal volt-
age on load. After a few milliseconds (a few seconds
at max), the motor reaches its normal speed and the
I
"peak"
S1
A1 1 3 5 Operating cycle
under AC_3 duty
K1 S2
A2 2 4 6 K1 Nominal
current
Time
K1
Closing of Opening of
contactor contactor
9
Applications
Protection against overloads

This function is ensured by thermal relays. The rules for It crosses the supplying circuit that incurs the same risk.
installation highly recommend to have the motor and its But, this circuit can also be overloaded by a current of
supplying circuit protected against overloads. defect.
Motor overloads are from mechanic origin and affect the As the circuit is normally calibrated for the motor cur-
equipment driven or the motor itself. rent, the thermal relay protects both of them against
The resulting overcurrent may damage the insulation of overloads.
the windings by excess of heat.
Time
mini 105 % Ir
Fuses for the protection Operation of a
L1 L2 L3 of the contacto'rs maxi 120 % Ir thermal relay
control circuit
Q1 F1
Q1 F2
Motor current
variation during
S3 40 s
the start-up
K1
10 s
S1
2s
F2
S2 KM1
multiples of
U V W I adjustment
Ir 2 3.5 5
towards motor Q1 KM1 I adjustment = I motor
The combination «contactor + thermal relay» consti- The standard use corresponds to the category 10.
tutes a direct starter complying with the IEC 947-4 For long start-ups, we recommend to select relays of
standards. categories 20 or 30.
Moreover, this one functions when the motor is in danger
in case of one phase cut-off (due to the fusion of fuses for If the start-ups succeed one another at the rate of
example). Such operations of the relay are called differ- 30 per hour or more, the thermal relay may not be
ential operations, the relay only starts to operate for a adapted to the duty for which the motor has been espe-
balanced overcurrent, between 105 and 120 % of the cially selected. In that case, the protection should be
current for which it is adjusted, and provokes the open- ensured by an electronic relay or by a sonde incorpo-
ing of the contactor in a time all the more short since rated into the motor and coupled with a relay.
the overcurrent is significant.
Protection against short-circuits

This protection is ensured by cut-outs or circuit breakers The IEC 947-4 recommendations define 2 types of co-
with fuses. Iq is the presumed short-circuit current value ordination from which no danger should result to peo-
(according to IEC 947-4) corresponding to the short-cir- ple or installations:
cuit current that is likely to be reached if the Protective Type 1: after the short-circuit, the materialsshouldn‘t be
Device against Short-Circuits or DPCC doesn‘t interrupt in a position to function without repair or replacement
it. This is the maximum short-circuit current value for of damaged parts.
which the manufacturer warrants the co-ordination. Type 2: after the short-circuit, the materials should be in
Short-circuit can happen in the circuit, in the motor‘s a position to function (the risk of soldering is possible).
terminal box or in its windings after the destruction of The co-ordination tables proposed are resulting from
the insulation. satisfactory tests undertaken under the Iq current and
the r current according to IEC 947-4.
As per the NFC 15-100 standards, a «DPCC» must pro- * The testing current r is a conventional value of the
tect the circuit, the equipment it includes and eventually short-circuit current that depends on the current of
the environment of the motor. use AC_3.
The compatibility of the components associated for a
«motor start-up» - contactor, thermal relay, circuit
breaker or fuses - and the quality level of protection are
assessed by the co-ordination class. The most current
one is «co-ordination 2».
10
Applications
Safety cut-offs or emergency stop

According to the installation rules NFC 15-100 (§ 462), It has to be possible to stop the machine, putting the
this function is necessary when a danger to human beings circuit off-load by acting on a single, easy to access and
can result from a failure during the operation or an electri- fastly recognisable system - one or several emergency
cal defect. stop switches piloting the contactor(s).
Association «contactors - thermal relays - co-ordination type 2 - 50 kA fuses»
Permanent, temporary or intermittent service up to

30 cycles of operation per hour.
Ambient temperature � 55 C°.
Adjustment zone Types of fuses

Motor(1) Three-pole of the three-pole aM g1 or
contactor differential BS 88
thermal relay Calibre Calibre
220/230 V 380/400 V
kW ch In(A) kW ch In(A) Calibre A A A
30 40 103 55 75 105 CBA 55 150 80/125 125 200
40 54 134 75 100 138 CBA 55 150 100/160 160 200
45 60 150 80 110 147 CBA 55 150 100/160 160 200
55 75 182 90 125 170 CBA 55 150 125/200 200 250
63 85 203 110 150 205 CBA 55 150 160/250 250 315
75 100 240 132 180 245 CBA 55 200 200/315 315 400
80 110 260 150 205 200 CBA 55 200 200/315 315 400
110 150 356 185 250 342 CBA 75 400 250/400 400 500
200 270 370 CBA 75 400 315/500 400 500
140 190 450 250 340 460 CBA 75 500 315/500 500 630
147 200 472 CBA 75 630 400/630 500 630
180 245 578 315 430 584 CBA 75 800 400/630 630 800
200 270 626 335 450 620 CBA 75 800 500/800 800 1000
220 300 700 400 545 710 CBA 75 800 500/800 800 1000
(1)the values given in the table are normalised outputs and average nominal
voltages. The relay will be adjusted for the current indicated on the ID
plate of the motor or, failing that, for the one given in the In column.
For any other output, select the relay covering the nominal current with
the corresponding contactor and fuses of the same calibre or immediately
superior to In.
11
Applications
«Star-delta» start-up
General
«Delta-star» start-ups are used: The motor torque - star connection during start-up - is
- either to limit the inrush current at the start-up of a also reduced to the third of the value corresponding to
motor according to the recommendations of installa- a direct start-up.
tion. Indeed, the motor torque is proportional to the square
- or to reduce the torque and the mechanical stress on of the supply voltage.
the machine. For 0.58 Un, we have (0.58)2 i.e. 1/3.
By admitting that, the motor torque for direct start-up is
This kind of start-up can only be applied to squirrel-cage 1.5 times the nominal torque i.e. Cd = 1.5 Cn, the star
motors equipped with 6 terminals, whose motor star connection torque during is of Cd = 0.5 Cn start-up.
connection voltage corresponds to the network voltage. This kind of start-up allows the maximum motor torque
for the minimum line current.
In this case of star connection motors, each winding is This kind of start-up is suitable for low or medium -
Un power machines starting in neutral or with low loads,
supplied with 0.58 Un (i.e. ------- ) which enables to avoid
3 example: low-inertia machine, compressor starting in
a signifiant inrush current on the line and to limit the neutral, pumps starting with closed gates, small fans.
value at the third of the one for direct start-up, i.e. ca
2 In.
Squirrel-cage motor operation curves.
Current
Current X Cn
2.5
X In
7
6 2
5
1.5
4
3 Cn 1
0.5
In 1
Speed Speed
0 0
0.25 0.50 0.75 1 0.25 0.50 0.75 1
delta connection current (direct) delta connection current (direct)

star connection current star torque
resistive torque of the machine
Recommendations of use
Let L1, L2 and L3 be the chronological order of succes-
sion of the phases. In order to reduce the transient cur- 2 4 6
rent resulting from the change from star connection to
delta connection, the cabling is recommended to be as U1 V1 W1
follows: Recommended connection to reverse
motor winding U1-U2 between L1 and L3 the motor‘s rotating direction (Nor-
delta connection V1-V2 between L2 and L1 malised motor, shaftend side view).
WI-W2 between L3 and L2.
U2 V2 W2
In case of reverse rotation of the motor and in order to

comply with the above conditions, it is recommended to
cross two windings of the motor according to the oppo-
site drawing.
12
Applications
«Star-delta» start-up
Selection of components
The components are placed according to the following Starting current can be withstood for 20 seconds (dur-
drawing: ing 2 successive start-ups of 10 sec. each).
■ K2 and K3 contactors are calibrated at Such contactors are equipped with a temporiser. The
Ie (AC_3) ≈ 0.58 In motor. In motor thermal protection relay must be adjusted at 0.58 In
■ K1 is calibrated at Ie (AC_3) = ---------------------- motor.
3
Operation
L1 L2 L3 K3:5 I>
F1
remote
control
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 O
K2 K3 K1
2 4 6 2 4 6
I KM2
2 4 6
K1
U1 V1 W1
K2 K2
1 3 5
F3
K3 K1
2 4 6
U2 V2 W2
A1 A1 A1
K3:1 I> A2 A2 A2
F2 K1 K3 K2
2 4 6 Starting sequence:
U1 V1 W1 1st step:
Recommended connection to reverse Closing of K1, closing of K2, start-up of the «star»
the motor‘s rotating direction (Normal- motor.
ised motor, shaftend side view). Starting temporisation adjusted to obtain 80 % of the
star connection speed.
U2 V2 W2
2nd step:
Opening of K1, closing of K3, «delta» connection.
«Star delta» changeover - Role of the temporisation

Make sure that the «star delta» changeover lasts long
enough to enable the extinction of the arcs, in order to
avoid short-circuit between phases.
13
Applications
«Start-up» by auto-transformers
General
■ The start-up by autotransformer has the following advan- ■ The start-up is made of 3 steps:
tages: - autotransformer «star» changeover by K1, then closing
- it is suitable for all cage motor start-up: at 3 terminals, of the contactor K2. The motor starts under reduced
6 or 9 terminals according to the North-American tech- voltage.
nology. - opening of the neutral point by K1. A winding part of
- start-up occurs under reduced voltage. the autotransformer is inserted in each phase during a
- it provides the maximum torque for the minimum line short time constituting a statory star inductance.
current. - a third contactor K3 connects the motor under full
2
- it enables to adapt the starting torque (C = f (U ) ) network voltage and provokes the autotransformer
to the resistive torque of the machine, thanks to its 2 ou «OFFLOAD» by K2.
3 intermediary voltage measures of which generally
only one is used (0.65 - 0.80 Un or The autotransformer used generally has an air-gap
0.50 - 0.65 - 0.80 Un). (adjusted or not) so as to obtain, during the 2nd step of
- it is used to start high-power and/or high-inertia machi- start-up, an inductance «series of values» compatible
nes. with a correct start-up.
- the motor is never separated from its supplying source
during the start-up (closed transition) and transient
phenomena are suppressed.
Typical values for a start-up by autotr ansformer

■ Operations curves:
Current
X Cn
Current
2.5
X In
7
ID 6 2
1.5
4
I2 3 Cn 1
0.5
In
1
Speed
Speed
0 0
0.25 0.50 0.75 1 0.25 0.50 0.75 1
direct connection current direct motor torque

torque with autotransformer torque with autotransformer
resistive torque of the machine
14
Applications
«Start-up» by auto-transformers
Constitution of a starter
■ Operation
Power circuit Operation
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 Manual closing of Q1.
Q1 Closing of K1: star connection of the autotransformer.
2 4 6
1 3 5 Closing of K2: supply of the autotransformer, start-up
F2
of the motor.
Opening of K1: elimination of the star connection of the
2 4 6
autotransformer, the motor is transiently supplied
through a part of the windings of the autotransformer.
K3 1 3 5 1 3 5
Closing of K3: direct supply of the motor.
2 4 6 2 4 6 Opening of K2: elimination of the autotransformer.
U1 V1 W1 Particularities: Q1: calibre In motor,
F2: calibre In motor.
T1
U3
V3
W3
U V W U2 V2 W2
2 4 6
K1
M
1 3 5
3
Control circuit Operation

F1 2
1
Pulse on S2.
Q1:2
Q1
Closing of K1.
Locking of K3 by K1.
F2 Closing of KA1 by K1 and supply of the thermal tempo-
riser relay F3.
F3 Closing of KM2 by KA1.
Self-supply of K2.
S1 Opening of K1 by KA1.
Closing of K3 by K1.
S2 Locking of K1 by K3.
Self-supply of K3.
KA1 Opening of KA1 by K3.
K1 K3 K2 Elimination of F3 by K3.
Opening of K2 by KA1.
Stop: pulse on S1.
K3 K1 KA1 K3
F3: Thermal temporiser relay ensuring the protection of
A1 A1 A1 A1 1 the autotransformer against too frequent or incomplete
start-ups.
Q1:6 A2 A2 A2 A2 6T3
K1 K3 K2 KA1 F3
For the control of single running Normalised Recom-
direction motors. Contactors Fuses
outputs mended delay
To be mounted by the customer 220/230 V 380/400 V Line K3 Autotransformer K2 Star K1 of thermal aM gl calibres
(on frame or in cabinet). relay
Selection of components: kW kW type type type calibre A A
40 75 CBA 55 150 3.0 CBA 55 80 3.0 CBA 55 80 3.0 100 to 160 160 200
The contactors defined in the
51 90 CBA 55 150 3.0 CBA 55 150 3.0 CBA 55 80 3.0 125 to 200 200 250
opposite table have been deter-
63 110 CBA 55 150 3.0 CBA 55 150 3.0 CBA 55 80 3.0 160 to 250 250 315
mined according to the following 75 132 CBA 55 200 3.0 CBA 55 150 3.0 CBA 55 150 3.0 200 to 315 250 315
criteria: 90 160 CBA 75 400 3.0 CBA 55 200 3.0 CBA 55 150 3.0 250 to 400 315 400
- starting current = 6 In, 110 200 CBA 75 400 3.0 CBA 75 400 3.0 CBA 55 150 3.0 315 to 500 400 500
- starting time: 30 sec, 140 250 CBA 75 500 3.0 CBA 75 400 3.0 CBA 55 200 3.0 400 to 630 500 630
- number of start-ups per hour: 3; 180 315 CBA 75 630 3.0 CBA 75 400 3.0 CBA 55 200 3.0 400 to 630 630 800
2 of which are consecutive, 200 355 CBA 75 800 3.0 CBA 75 500 3.0 CBA 75 200 3.0 500 to 800 800 1000
- ambient temperature e ,:: 40° C, 220 400 CBA 75 800 3.0 CBA 75 500 3.0 CBA 75 400 3.0 500 to 800 800 1000
- transient on closing of 250 450 CBA 75 1000 3.0 CBA 75 630 3.0 CBA 75 400 3.0 630 to 1000 800 1000
280 500 CBA 75 1000 3.0 CBA 75 630 3.0 CBA 75 400 3.0 630 to 1000 1000 1250
K 3 ≤ 7 2 × In .
315 560 CBA 71 1250 3.0 CBA 75 630 3.0 CBA 75 500 3.0 630 to 1000 1000 1250
(1) for parallel connection of the fuses, make 335 630 CBA 71 1250 3.0 CBA 75 630 3.0 CBA 75 500 3.0 1250 2 x 800(1)
sure to strictly respect the manufacturer‘s 400 710 CBA 71 1600 3.0 CBA 75 800 3.0 CBA 75 500 3.0 1250 2 x 800(1)
recommendations. 450 800 CBA 71 1600 3.0 CBA 75 800 3.0 CBA 75 500 3.0 2 x 800(1) 2 x 1000(1)
500 900 CBA 71 2000 3.0 CBA 75 1000 3.0 CBA 75 630 3.0 2 x 800(1) 2 x 1000(1)
15
Applications
How to select contactors
For rotary circuits of slip-ring motors
(elimination of starting resistors)
The most common application is for starters and with- The selections below take into account:
out rotor speed adjustment: pumps, fans, conveyers, - a ratio of 2 between the maximum rotary voltage of use
compressors, etc... (Uer) and the statory voltage of use (Ues), ratio pro-
posed by the IEC 947-4 standards, section «starters».
Rotary contactors are subjected to the statory contactor - a warranty for casual operations (current switch-on and
and only open after this one, when the rotary voltage switch-off ratings) recommended by these same stan-
has disappeared or nearly disappeared. dards.
They make the current corresponding to the usual start- The use of contactors with magnetic blow-out are recom-
ing peak (1.5 to 2.5) of the nominal rotary current and mended in case of control via manual combinative device.
open the circuit in neutral. This use is characterised by
an easy closing and switch-off.
"Star" connection "Delta" connection V connection W connection
Current factor and rotary voltages of use according to the contactor connection
Factor(1) Ue max. three-phase rotary Ue three-phase rotary voltage

Type of I rotary voltage in Volts with counter-current in Volts
connection -------------------- Type of contactors
I of use CBA with reinforced insulation CBA with normal insulation
Star 1 2000 V 1000 V
Delta 1.5 1700 V 850 V
In V 1 1700 V 850 V
In W 1.6 1700 V 850 V
(1) factor to be applied to the values mentioned in the table below for currents of use.
Table of currents of use (ambient temperature inferior or equal to 40°C)
Calibre of CBA contactor 80 150 200 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500
Changeo- Current of use in Amps
ver time
Intermediarycontactor:with 10 s 277 519 692 1385 1732 2182 2771 3464 4330 5542 6928 8660
numberof operationcycles 30 s 160 300 400 800 1000 1260 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000
inferiororequal to 30/hour 60 s 113 212 282 565 707 890 1131 1414 1767 2262 2828 3535
ver time
Intermediarycontactor: with 5s 277 519 692 1385 1732 2182 2771 3464 4330 5542 6928 8660
numberof operationcycles 10 s 160 300 400 800 1000 1260 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000
ver time
Intermediarycontactor: with 5s 195 367 489 979 1224 1543 1959 2449 3061 3919 4898 6123
numberof operationcycles
16
Applications
How to select contactors
For rotary circuits of slip-ring motors
In a simple starting equipment, the contactors that For a regenerative braking equipment, the rotary voltage
short-circuit the rotary current go through a static volt- of use corresponds to the insulating voltage.
age stress whose «decreasing with time value» is all the
more low since they are far from the rotor‘s terminals. For slowing down or braking equipment, the selection
Therefore, the rotary voltage of use can be deduced of related contactors will also have to take the switch-
from the maximum voltage of use. It is then possible to off conditions into account.
use contactors whose nominal insulating voltage is infe-
rior to the rotary voltage. This use is characterised by an The use of contactors with magnetic blow-out are recom-
easy closing and switch-off. mended in case of control via manual combinative device.
The selections below take a ratio of 2 between the maxi-

mum rotary voltage of use (Uer) and the statory voltage
of use (Ues) into account, ratio proposed by the
IEC 947-4 standards, section «starters».
Current factor and rotary voltages of use accordi ng to the contactor‘s connection
The temporary allowable current according to the start-
ing time must be taken into account for the current
crossing the contactor of a rotary circuit. Only the con-
tactor for rotor short-circuit takes the permanent cur-
rent into account.
Ue maximum Ue three-
I rotary phase rotary
Type of Drawing of the circuit I of use three-phase voltage with Type of
connection rotary volt- contactor
in Amps age in Volts counter-cur-
rent in Volts
1 1320 660 CBA
Star 1 2000 1000 CBA with rein-
forced insulation
1.5 1100 550 CBA
Delta CBA with rein-

1.5 1700 850
forced insulation
1 1100 550 CBA
V CBA with rein-

1 1700 850
forced insulation
17
Applications
How to select CBA contactors
Control of three phase capacitor batteries
used for power factor correction
The capacitors make with the circuit at the terminals of In compliance with the VDE 0560, NFC 54 100, IEC 70
which they are connected, oscillating circuits able to standards, the contactor for control must be able to
create high transient with high frequencies overcurrents withstand a permanent voltage of 1.43 times the nomi-
as they are connected. nal current of the level controlled.
Generally speaking, the peak on closing is all the more
low since: The powers of use indicated in the tables below take
- the network inductances are high, this overload into account.
- the power of line transformers is small,
- the transformer short-circuit voltage is high, The protection against short-circuits is usually ensured
- the ratio between the addition of the powers of con- by g1 fuses calibrated at 1.3 to 1.4 In.
nected capacitors and the power of the capacitor to be
connected is small (in case of multilevel batteries).
Use of contactors
Connection is direct. The values of the peak current on Compensation by multilevel capacitor battery
closing shouldn‘t exceed the ones mentioned below. The insertion of a shock self-inductive coil in each of the
If the peak current has to be reduced, insert an self- 3 phases of each level is compulsory.
inductive coil or a pre-closing resistor in each of the
3 capacitor supply phases. The dimensions of the self- Nota:
inductive coils will be scheduled according to the tem- Shock coils with minimum inductance of 4 µH. These
perature chosen during operation. can be obtained by winding 4 or 6 turns of 15 cm diam-
eter each round the conductor of each phase.
Compensation by single-level capacitor battery
The insertion of a shock self-inductive coil is useless as
the inductance of the network is sufficient to limit the
peak to values compatible with the characteristics of
contactors.
Table of contactor‘s maximum powers of use

Connection with possible shock self-inductive coils. Power of use: 50/60 Hz, ambient temperature :,: 40 °C.
Battery power In (A)

(kVAR) Type of contactor
Three phase network 220/240 V
5 CBA 55 80SR(1) 20 A 20
7.5 CBA 55 80SR(1) 40 A 32
10 CBA 55 80SR(1) 40 A 38
12.5 - 15 CBA 55 80SR(1) 40 A 40
20 CBA 55 80 80
25 CBA 55 150 100
30 - 35 CBA 55 150 125
40 - 47.5 CBA 55 150 160
50 CBA 55 200 200
60 CBA 55 200 250
75 - 90 CBA 75 400 320
100 - 120 CBA 75 400 400
150 CBA 75 500 500
180 CBA 75 630 630
Three phase network 400/440 V
10 CBA 55 80SR(1) 25 A 25
15 CBA 55 80SR(1) 40 A 38
20 CBA 55 80 50
25 - 30 CBA 55 80 63
45 - 50 CBA 55 150 115
65 CBA 55 150 125
70 - 75 - 80 CBA 55 150 160
90 CBA 55 200 200
100 - 125 CBA 55 200 250
150 CBA 75 400 315
180 - 200 CBA 75 400 400
240 - 250 CBA 75 500 500
300 CBA 75 630 630
350 CBA 75 800 800
(1) SR: reinforced blowout.
18
Applications
How to select contactors for heating circuits
General
A heating circuit is a terminal circuit supplying one or Rules of motor’s supply circuits are also applicable for
several resistant heating elements controlled by a con- heating circuits, taking into account the fact that nor-
tactor. mally they cannot carry overcurrents. This can only pro-
tect them against short-circuits.
Heating elements features

Here are only considered heating systems with resistive Moreover, this peak only fully appears when first ener-
elements used for industrial ovens, offices (infrared gised, if the temperature variations are limited by a
heaters, convectors, etc…). The resistancevariation regulator.
between “ hot and cold” creates a current peak in the
system that never exceeds 2 to 3 Un when the voltage is The output and the nominal current are given for the
applied. duty temperature.
Protection
The current absorbed in permanent duty by a heating You may choose:
circuit is constant when the voltage is stable. - g1 class fuses or,
- modular circuit breakers.
As in an existing system, the number of receptors are
very unlikely to vary and as such a circuit is unable to Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more
create overloads, it can only be protected against short- economical (due to the cable section) to use a protec-
circuits. tion system coupling thermal relays and aM fuses.
Connection - Control - Protection

One element (or a group of elements) with a given out- Three-phase current connection
put can be single-phase or three-phase and supplied Circuit controlled by the 3 poles of the contactor.
either by 220/127 V or by 380/220 V. U
The different possible connections can be classified into U U
3 groups:
C1
2 pole single-phase current connection
Circuit controlled by 2 poles of the contactor.
U
C1 d

Circuit controlled by a tetrapolar contactor whose poles
are connected 2 to 2 in parallel via suitable small junc-
tion bars. This solution allows the control of outputs
more or less equivalent to the ones controlled by the
same contactor in three-phasecurrent.
.
U
C1
19
Applications
How to select contactors for heating circuits
How to select contactors from the output controll ed

The combinations proposed thereunder are given for an
ambient temperature of 50°C and for outputs under
nominal voltage; they still ensure the control even in
case of a lasting overvoltage at 110 % of Un.

Maximum output in kW
Calibre of contactor
220/230V 380/400V 415V 440V 500V 660V 1000V
CBA 55 80 2.0 18 32 33 35 40 52
CBA 55 150 2.0 46 80 83 88 100 132 200
CBA 55 200 2.0 58 102 106 112 128 168 256
CBA 75 400 2.0 73 128 132 140 160 211 320
CBA 75 500 2.0 92 160 166 176 200 264 400
CBA 75 630 2.0 110 192 199 211 240 316 480
CBA 75 800 2.0 147 256 265 281 320 422 640
CBA 75 1000 2.0 184 320 332 352 400 528 800
CBA 71 1250 2.0 230 400 415 440 500 660 1000
CBA 71 1600 2.0 294 512 531 563 640 844 1280
CBA 71 2000 2.0 368 640 664 704 800 1056 1600

220/230V 380/400V 415V 440V 500V 660V 1000V
CBA 55 80 4.0 25 44 46 49 56 73
CBA 55 150 4.0 64 112 116 123 140 184 280
CBA 55 200 4.0 82 143 148 157 179 236 358
CBA 75 400 4.0 103 179 185 197 224 295 448
CBA 75 500 4.0 128 224 232 246 280 369 560
CBA 75 630 4.0 154 268 278 295 336 443 672
CBA 75 800 4.0 206 358 371 394 448 591 896
CBA 75 1000 4.0 257 448 464 492 560 739 1120
CBA 71 1250 4.0 322 560 581 616 700 924 1400
CBA 71 1600 4.0 412 716 743 788 896 1182 1792
CBA 71 2000 4.0 515 896 929 985 1120 1478 2240
three-phase current connection

220/230V 380/400V 415V 440V 500V 660V 1000V
CBA 55 80 3.0 39 69 71 76 86 114
CBA 55 150 3.0 99 173 179 190 216 285 433
CBA 55 200 3.0 127 221 230 243 277 365 554
CBA 75 400 3.0 159 277 287 304 346 457 692
CBA 75 500 3.0 199 346 359 381 433 571 866
CBA 75 630 3.0 239 415 431 457 519 685 1039
CBA 75 800 3.0 318 554 575 609 692 914 1385
CBA 75 1000 3.0 398 692 718 762 866 1143 1732
CBA 71 1250 3.0 497 866 898 952 1082 1428 2165
CBA 71 1600 3.0 637 1108 1150 1219 1385 1829 2771
CBA 71 2000 3.0 796 1385 1437 1524 1732 2286 3464
20
Description of contactor’s
components
Frame
The basic frame of contactor consists of one fixed rod for The shaft and the rod(s) are coated with a high-resistance
the 80 to 200 A range or four fixed rods for the 400 to insulator. The mechanical endurance of these contactors
5000 A range, a moving shaft, two bearings and their is of several million operations.
bushes.
Frame CBA - CBC - 71 - 1250/2000 A type

Electromagnet
The electromagnet consists of a “magnetic circuit + trip Use in DC mode:
coil” assembly, normally located on the right side of the
poles. A laminated magnetic circuit can be used in DC mode
In compliance with international standards, voltage at without any drawbacks. In this case, the coil used differs
coil terminals must be between 85 and 110% of the from the coil normally used for AC voltage of same value
coil’s nominal voltage. and requires the insertion of an economy resistor.
Coil DC type magnetic circuit
The function of the coil is to produce the magnetic flux No eddy currents are formed in the magnetic circuit of an
required to attract the moving armature of the electro- electromagnet supplied with DC current. In some cases, it
magnet. is preferable to select a solid steel electromagnet espe-
It is designed to resist the mechanical shocks caused by cially designed for DC current instead of the AC current
the closings and openings of the contactors and the type laminated magnetic circuit, requiring indispensible
electromagnetic shocks caused by the current passing adaptations, as they are better suited to the conditions of
through its windings. use (high rates, high endurance, no peak on closing).
The coils used are especially resistant to overvoltages,

shocks, aggressive environmental conditions and are
made of reinforced enamelled copper wire; they are
Coil for laminated magnetic circuit
vacuum impregnated and some are overmoulded.
AC type magnetic circuit
Characteristics:
- silicon steel plates assembled by rivets,
- laminated circuit to reduce the eddy currents which are
generated in all metallic masses subjected to alternat-
ing flux (these eddy currents reduce the effective flux
for a given magnetizing current and cause unwanted
heating of the magnetic circuit),
- accurate grinding of the fixed and moving parts ensur-
ing silent operation,
- one or two phase-shift or Frager rings creating, in part
of the circuit, a flux offset with respect to the main
alternating flux. This feature prevents the periodic elim-
ination of the attraction force total flux (which would
cause noisy vibrations).
Coil for solid magnetic circuit
21
Description of contactor’s components
Main poles
6
12 These poles make and break the current in the power cir-
cuit. Consequently, they are sized to take the nominal
8 current of the contactor, in permanent duty, without
abnormal heating.
They include a fixed part and a moving part, the moving
5 1 part is equipped with springs transferring a suitable pres-
3
sure to the contacts.
The kinematic study of the contacts and magnetic circuits
has allowed us to keep the contact bounce to a minimum
which contributes to an extended electrical lifetime.
The main poles are single pin.
The current only passes through the arc-blowout pole coil
during opening. It is introduced into the circuit by the arc
when it passes from the fixed pin to the arc-blowout
horn.
2 Used to solve some automatic operating problems, rup-
turing poles operate in the opposite way to opening
4 7 poles: their contacts are “conductive” when the control
electromagnet is not supplied and “nonconductive”
11 when energized.
10
9
View of a c osing po e Main contacts Arc-blowout coil

CBA - CBC 71 2000 A
80 to 200 A range, two types of contacts exist: Depending on the current, this coil is made of a flat edge
- copper contacts (C) for current use, semi-intensive and conductor or round enamelled wire.
1: fixed contact, intensive duties (AC_2 - AC’2 - AC_3 - AC_4 - DC_2 - The arc-blowout coil is normally sized for the pole’s nom-
2: moving contact, DC_3 - DC_4 - DC_5 use). inal thermal current.
3: upper connecting section, - silver or silver alloy contacts (M) for continuous, semi- In DC, when the current used is 50 % lower than the
4: lower connecting section, intensive and intensive duties particularly recom- nominal thermal current of the device, the arc-blowout
5: arc blowout coil, mended for low voltages and corrosive or dusty envi- coil must be adapted to suit the current used.
6: arc blowout cage, ronmental conditions (AC_1 - AC_2 - AC’2 - AC_3 -
7: moving blowout horn, DC_1 - DC_2 - DC_3 - DC_4 - DC_5 use). Blowout cages
8: fixed blowout horn,
9: fixation bars, 400 to 1000 A range: All arc-blowout poles are equipped with blowout cages.
10: moving shaft, - silver - calcium oxide contact. They are made of “compound polyester” for the 80 to
11: supple connection, 2000 A range and of micro-concrete reinforced with
12: metallic wing. 1250 to 2000 A range: glass fibre for the 2500 to 6200 A range. In addition, all
■ 1250 A poles:
the blowout cages for contactors ranging from 150 to
2000 A are equipped with metallic wings that fraction
- copper contact (C),
the electric arc, allowing its extinction and dissipation.
- silver cadmium oxide contact (M) on request for use The easy and fast extraction of these blowout cages
with very low voltages or in corrosive or dusty environ- allows at any time the main contacts to be efficiently
mental conditions. checked for wear and replaced if necessary.
Changing the contact type does not increase the nominal
thermal current of the device.
■ 1600 to 2000 A poles:
- silver cadmium oxide contact only.
■ 2500 to 5000 A poles:
- copper contact (C),
- silver cadmium oxide contact (M).
22
Auxiliary contacts
There are three types: - M block
- D block Several configurations possible.
Including 1 normally open contact and 1 normally closed
contact, installed above the magnetic circuit for the - TP 86 pneumatic delayed block
400 to 1000 A range with a maximum of 4 blocks D per (See technical specifications for each type).
magnetic circuit.
Mechanical locking between two contactors

Types of contactors allowing mutual mechanical locking For a different center-to-center distance or for locking
of two contactors exist. two contactors of different sizes, please consult our tech-
This locking is achieved by rod and requires vertical align- nical department.
ment of the bearings opposite the magnetic circuit on
the two contactors.
Locking by “RONIS” type lock

Possibility to lock all types of contactors by a “RONIS”
type lock.
Support manufactured on request (lock not supplied).
23
Mechanical latching with electrical release

General
Mechanically latched contactors are equipped with a ■ Operation

mechanical locking facility with electrical and manual
release that enables them to remain closed although the Such contactors are equipped with a mechanical latching
coil is no more supplied. facility with one or two tripping coils, supplied in direct or
alternating current (in that first case, the coils are not
■ Use polarised). When a short pulse is applied to the contactor
(control by pulse switch, required time > 0.5 s), this one
Specific properties of contactors with mechanical latch- closes and remains mechanically latched. It is no more
ing and electrical release make them suitable for various necessary to supply the closing coil, the contactor
applications. remains closed.
The opening of the contactor is obtained by exciting the
❑ Properties tripping coil.
- preservation of the sequence memory in automation ■ Precautions of use

equipments in case of disappearance of the control
voltage. For 80 to 200 A range, it is necessary to foresee one
- energy savings, as the coil‘s source of supply does not automatic switch-off contact for the tripping coil(s) to
produce any current when the contactor is lachted. avoid their destruction in case of extended command. For
- change of state “open”-”closed” by supplying the trip- other ranges, this contact is directly pre-cabled on the
ping coil. contactor as all these coils are pulse coils.
- insensibility to the network’s disruptions.
- silent contactors when latched. ■ Manual release facility
❑ Applications On standard versions, for our whole range (except 80 to

200 A range) contactors are equipped with a manual
These contactors are suitable for: release facility, useful in case of disappearance of the con-
- refineries, power stations, excitation circuits, electro- trol voltage for example (for 80 to 200 A range, available
magnet controls,… on request).
- contactors remaining closed for long times, example:
- refinery, ■ Options
- power supply,
- low voltage distribution. Individual protective system for the tripping coils provid-
- selective opening control. ing memorisation of the defect that caused the opening,
- no untimely closings or openings of the main poles. one contact for its visualisation and remote or local clos-
- current conductor for applications over 1000 V. ing facility can be supplied separately on a pre-cabled
support plate.
All our contactors can be equipped with a

mechanical latching with single or double release.
24
Auxiliar y contacts
As for the main poles, the

number of auxiliary contacts
can vary in a significant way.
3 types of auxiliary contacts
blocks exist:
D type
Available only on the
80 to 1000 A range.
M type
Avaible on all our range of contactors;
several configurations are possible to D type block
meet all the requirements.
TP 86 type
Delayed blocks available on all our
range of contactors:
-A: delayed at rest,
-C: delayed at work.
M type block
Delayed block
25
Auxiliarycontacts
Technical features and overall dimensions
M type blocks
1. Instantanés Type M
Use Description
On all modular contactors from 80 to 6200 A. ■ Block of 2 (M2) or 3 (M3) silver pad contacts with double
break on closing or opening.
■ The flexibility of the fixed support causes a self-cleaning
action on the contacts allowing use for low control volt-
ages (24 and 48 V) without risk of failure.
Technical features
Maximum operating voltage

AC V 500
DC V 600
Thermal nominal current A 15
Current switch-on rating 500 VAC or 600 VDC A 60
Current switch-off rating under a voltage of V 110 220 440 500 600
AC A 15 15 15 15
DC
on resistivecircuit
1 contact A 15 5 1 0.75 0.6
Block of 5 (M5) silver pad contacts with dou- 2 contacts in series A 15 3.25 3
3 contacts in series A 5 4.5
ble break on closing or opening for 1250 to
on inductivecircuit
5000 A range, on request. L/R= 15 ms
1 contact A 7 1 0.5 0.4 0.3
2 contacts in series A 15 1.5 0.75 0.7
3 contacts in series A 8 2 1.2
on inductivecircuit
L/R= 40 ms
1 contact A 3 0.4 0.15 0.14
2 contacts in series A 15 0.7 0.6 0.4
3 contacts in series A 2.5 0.7 0.6
Weight
M2 kg 0.210
M3 kg 0.260
Dimensions
M2 block M3 block
40
102 102
56 56
travel 8 travel 8
26
Auxiliarycontacts
Different versions
M type blocks
Operating diagrams (instant M type)
Items Diagra ms Sche matics Items Diagra ms Sche matics

M type with 2 contacts
2.4 2.2 4.2 2.2
NO 1 NO 1
O2 - Z O2 - Y
NO 2 NO 2
2.3 2.1 4.1 2.1
1.4 1.2 1.2 3.2

NC 1 NC 1
F2 - Z F2 - Y
NC 2 NC 2
1.3 1.1 1.1 3.1
2.2 1.2 2.2 3.2

NC 1 NC 1
F1O1 - Z F1O1 - Y
NO 2 NO 2
2.1 1.1 2.1 3.1
4.2 3.2 4.2 1.2

NC 1 NC 1
F1O1 - X F1O1 - W
NO 2 NO 2
4.1 3.1 4.1 1.1
M type with 3 contacts

NO 1 2.6 2.4 2.2 NO 1 4.2 2.4 2.2
O3 - Z NO 2 O3 - Y NO 2
NO 3 2.5 2.3 2.1 NO 4.1 2.3 2.1
3
NC 1 1.6 1.4 1.2 NC 1 1.4 1.2 3.2

F3 - Z NC 2 F3 - Y NC 2
NC 3 1.5 1.3 1.1 NC 3 1.3 1.1 3.1
NC 1 2.4 2.2 1.2 NC 1 2.4 2.2 3.2

F1O2 - Z NO 2 F1O2 - Y NO 2
NO 3 2.3 2.1 1.1 NO 3 2.3 2.1 3.1
NC 1 2.2 1.4 1.2 NC 1 2.2 1.2 3.2

F2O1 - Z NC 2 F2O1 - Y NC 2
NO 3 2.1 1.3 1.1 NO 3 2.1 1.1 3.1
NC 1 4.2 1.2 3.2 NC 1 4.2 1.4 1.2

F2O1 - X NC 2 F2O1 - W NC 2
NO 3 4.1 1.1 3.1 NO 3 4.1 1.3 1.1
NC 1 4.2 2.2 3.2 NC 1 4.2 2.2 1.2

F1O2 - X NO 2 F1O2 - W NO 2
NO 3 4.1 2.1 3.1 NO 3 4.1 2.1 1.1
Contact representation:
contact closed contact open
closing direction Use M arks
contacts made instant NC locking 1
contacts broken instant NO hold 2
2 2 delayed NC power-saving - overlap 3

5.5
5.5
travel 8 mm delayed NO overlap 4
27
Auxiliarycontacts
Technical features
D type blocks and delayed blocks
2. D type instant contacts

Use Description
On 80 to 1000 A bar contactors. Block of 2 contacts (NO + NC).

Under
ACvoltage of V 24 48 127 220 380 500
DCvoltage of V 24 48 110 220
Operating current
AC A 10 10 7 5 3 2.5
DC
resistivecircuit A 5 3 1 0.5
DC
inductivecircuit L/R= 15 ms A 5 2 0.8 0.3
Occasional current switch-on and switch-off rating
AC A 20 20 15 12 8 5
DC
resistivecircuit A 20 15 4 0.8
DC
inductivecircuit L/R= 15 ms A 20 15 3 0.6
3. TP 86 type delayed contacts

Use Description
On 80 to 6200 A modular contactors Block includes:
■ 4 instantaneous auxiliary contacts 3 NO + 1 NC.
■ 2 auxiliary contacts, 1 NO + 1 NC delayed; delay adjusta-
ble from 0 to 30 seconds.
2 different blocks:
TP 86 A: delayed block counting from contactor
closing.
TP 86 C: delayed block counting from contactor
opening.
Technical features

Nominal voltage V 660
Insulating voltage V 750
Under
ACvoltage of V 48 110/127 220 380 440 660
DCvoltage of V 24 48 110 220 440 600
On request, TP 86 type blocks can be deliv-
Operating power
ered with adjustable delay: 1 million operations
AC VA 300 500 600 520 500 390
- from 0.1 to 3 seconds,
DC W 120 90 75 68 61 58
- from 0.1 to 180 seconds 3 millionoperations
AC VA 160 300 330 300 280 190
DC W 70 50 38 33 28 27
10 million operations
AC VA 70 100 110 100 100 80
DC W 25 18 14 12 10 9
Occasional current switch-on and switch-off rating
AC VA 3000 7000 12000 15000 14000 13000
DC W 1000 700 400 260 220 170
28
CBC 80 to 630 A,
singl e-pole versions
2 types:
With a closing pole

CBC57 80,
CBC57 150,
CBC68 200,
CBC96 400,
CBC96 630.
Wi th an opening pole
RUBC 96 400,
RUBC 96 630.
CBC 57 80
CBC 96 400
Use Options
Switching-on and cutting-off resistive or inductivecir- ■ Possible addition M type auxiliary contact blocks (2 blocks
cuits. Nominal operating voltage: 500 Va. at maximum).
Description ■ Horizontal mechanical locking facility.
■ Single pin arc-blowout main pole (reinforced magnetic ■ Reinforced insulation.

blowout for adaptation to nominal current, on request).
■ Tropical treatment n° 2.
■ Silver or silver alloy contacts for all the range, for use
under continuous, semi-intensive and intensive duties
DC_1 to DC_5.
■ Copper contacts for the calibres 150, 200, 400 and

630 A for current use under semi-intensive and intensive
duties DC_2 to DC_5.
■ Solid closing electromagnet in iron, direct DC supply for

the coil without economy resistor, except for the RUBC
96 400 and 630 contactors.
29
CBC80 to 680 A, single-pole versions
Technical featuresCBC80 to 200 A-RUBC400 to 630 A
Single pole DCcontactors
4. CBC 80 - 150 - 200 - 400 - 630 and RUBC 400 to 630
Standards: IEC947.4.1.
(In conformity with UTEC 63-100, IEC 158-1 standards and VERITAS regulations.)
CBC 57-80 CBC 57-150 CBC 68-200
Thermal nominal current(1) A 100 250 320
connecting section mm2 35 70 95
Nominal operating voltage V 500 500 500
Maximum controlled powers(2) voltage V 220/250 440/500 220/250 440/500 220/250 440/500
DC_2 - DC_4 duty cycle kW 22 44 45 90 65 130
Current switch-off rating L/R = 15 ms, all contacts
in open air under 500 V A 500 1400 3500
in cubicle voltage V 250 500 250 500 250 500
safety perimeter for
metallic walls insulated walls
M N M N
45 25 35 20 A 300 3000 500
50 40 40 30 A 250
110 80 90 65 A 150
125 95 105 75 A 500 165 4250 600
140 110 120 90 A 900
175 125 145 105 A 700
195 145 185 135 A 1400 600
245 175 225 105 A 700 1000
Arcing time at current switch-off rating ms 60 75 88
Magnetic blowout normal A 100 250 320
reinforced A 10 - 16 - 25 - 40(4) 80(4) 150(4)
Current switch-on rating L/R = 15 ms A 500 1400 3500
Control circuit
standard voltages(3) V 110 - 115/125 - 220/230 110/125 - 220/230 110 - 115/125 - 200/220
consumptions W 19 23 30
closing time at Un ms 125 180 220
opening time between command and
separation of contacts ms 25 30 35
complete opening of electromagnet ms 77 85 110
Mechanical endurance millions of operations 5 5 10
Number maximum of instant auxiliary contacts 6 NO 6 NO 6 NO
(M type blocks with 2 or 3 contacts). 3 NO 1 NC 4 NO 1 NC 4 NO 2 NC
3 NC
RUBC 96 CBC 96
400 630 400 630
Thermal nominal current(1) A 500 630 500 630
connecting section mm2 240 400 240 400
Nominal operating voltage V 600 600 600 600
Maximum operating voltage V 700 700 700 700
DC_2 - DC_4 duty cycle kW 200 250 200 250
Current switch-off rating L/R = 15 ms
in open air under 500 V A 6000 8500 6000 8500
Safety perimeter for
metallic walls
M mm 80 100 80 100
N mm 40 60 40 60
insulated walls
M mm 40 60 40 60
N mm 30 40 30 40
Arcing time at current switch-off rating ms 40 40 40 40
Magnetic blowout normal A 400 630 400 630
Current switch-on rating L/R = 15 ms A 6000 8500 6000 8500
Control circuit
standard voltages(3) V 110 - 127 - 220/230 - 250
consumptions W 460/60 460/60 125 125
closing time at Un ms 160 160
opening time between command and
separation of contacts ms 50 50 38 38
Mechanical endurance millions of operations 10 10 10 10
Number maximum of instant auxiliary contacts
6 6 6 6
(M type blocks with 2 or 3 contacts).
(1) in open air, DC_1 duty, silver contacts and normal blowout. (4) possible blowout calibration:
(2) 30 operations/hour, duty factor f 20 %. CB 80 A: 1-2-3-4-6-10-16-25-40 A.
(3) for other voltages, please consult us. CB 150 A: 1-2-3-4-6-10-16-25-40-80 A.
CB 200 A: 1-2-3-4-6-10-16-25-40-80-150 A
30
Overall dimensionsCBC80 to 200 A
Single pole DCcontactors 500 VÜ
5. CBC 57 - 80 and 150 and 68 - 200
PF
D D
C M
B4
ØT
N
B2 B3
15 A4 A4 15
B1
65 65
86 86
ØK
= = B4
Ø4
bar 80 150 200

bare 25 x 16 25 x 16 40 x 20 D: instant contact block, form to be specifiied.
insulated 30 x 21 30 x 2 44 x 24
E: for CBC contactor with
A4 17 27 22 - zero C block: 175,
B 204 252 302 - one C block: 200,
B1 80 97 112 - two C blocks: 250.
B2 124 155 190 PF: attachment plane.
B3 126 180 189
B4 7 8 12,5
C 155,5 181,5 190
ØK 6 8 10
ØT 9 9 13
Example : li ft ing plane for travelling crane

for iron and steel industry
31
Overall dimensionsCBC400 to 630 A
Single pole DCcontactors 600 VÜ
6. CBC 96 - 400 - 630
Ø12
263 M
88
112.5
119
423.5
55
137
90
129 Ø12 243
Attachment on an insulated bar 44 x 24. Calibre M N

400 45 45
630 75 60
7. RUBC 96 - 400 - 630
88 Ø12 263 M
112,5
107
424,5
55
LENOIR ELEC
150
129 Ø12
Attachment on an insulated bar 44 x 24. Calibre M N

400 45 45
630 75 60
32
CB 80 to 200 A,
multipolar versions
4 types for each calibre :
AC poles and con trol circui t

CBA 55 80,
CBA 55 150,
CBA 55 200.
DC poles and AC con trol circuit

CBFC55 80,
CBFC55 150,
CBFC55 200.
AC poles and DC con trol circuit

CBPA 57 80,
CBPA 57 150,
CBPA 57 200.
CBA 55 80 3.0
DC poles and DC con trol circuit
CBC57B 80,
CBC57B 150,
CBC57B 200.
CBC 57 B 80 2.0
Calibres 80, 150 and 200 A Options
Single pin main poles and copper contacts (C) for current ■ For currents 50 % lower than the nominal thermal DC
use, semi-intensive and intensive duties (AC_2-AC’2- current, adaptation of the arc-blowout coil to the current
AC_3-AC_4-DC_2-DC_3-DC_4-DC_5). of use.
■ Calibre 80 and 150: 1 to 4 poles for each type. ■ Mechanichal latching with single or double electrical
release.
■ Calibre 200: 1 to 2 poles for CBC and CBPA contactors,
1 to 4 poles for CBA and CBFC contactors. ■ Metallic support for «Ronis type» lock (lock not supplied).
On request, contactors can be equipped with:
- silver or silver alloy contacts (M) for continuous, semi- ■ Opening poles without mechanical overlapping with the
intensive and intensive duties, especially recommended closing poles.
for low voltages and corrosive atmospheres (AC_1-
AC_2-AC’2-AC_3-DC_1-DC_2-DC_3-DC_4-DC_5 ■ Adaptation for mechanical locking facility for contactors
duties). of different ranges.
- closing electromagnet is located at the right side of the
poles: ■ Poles with different calibres and supplied with different
- supply from an AC source: laminated magnetic circuit; currents.
- supply from a DC source: solid magnetic circuit, with-
out power-saving device up to contactors 150 A, ■ Closing electromagnet mounted on the left side of the
3 poles, with power-saving device for contactors 150 A, poles.
4 poles; and contactors 200 A, 2 poles.
■ Longer attachment bars.
33
CB80 to 200 A, multipolarversions
Technical featuresCBA 55 - CBPA 57 80 to 200 A
ACcontactors
Ue up to 660 V, 50/60 Hz
Standards IEC947-4-1 80 * 150 * 200 *

Thermal nominal current(1) AC_1 A 100 250 320
Nominal insulation voltage V 1000 1000 1000
Nominal operating voltage
AC, 40 to 60 Hz V 660 660 660
Maximum controlledpowers
AC voltage V 220 380 500/660 220 380 500/660 220 380 500/660
(2)
AC’2 - AC_3 duties kW 22 45 60 65 110 145 80 132 160
AC_23 duties kVA 33 55 70 80 132 160 100 170 220
Maximum currents of use
continuous duty A 100 250 320
Short-time current, t :,: 40°C
1s kA 1 1.75 2.5
5s kA 0.5 0.8 1.15
10s kA 0.35 0.57 0.81
15s kA 0.3 0.51 0.7
30s kA 0.23 0.42 0.56
1 min kA 0.19 0.31 0.43
3 min kA 0.14 0.3 0.4
10 min kA 0.12 0.26 0.35
Nominal thermal current under 400 Hz A 60 113 150
Allowable overcurrent/time
AC kA eff/s 1/1 1.75/1(3) 2.5/1(3)
Current switch-off rating
AC voltage V 500 500 500
cos < = 0.3 kAeff 1.3(4) 1.85(4) 2.75(4)
Current switch-on rating
AC cos < = 0.3 kAeff 1.3(4) 1.85(4) 2.75(4)
Mechanical endurance millions of 3.5/10(5) 3.5/10(5) 3.5/10(5)
operations
Control circuit
Nominal voltages AC, 50 Hz V 24 - 48 - 110 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 500
DC V 12 - 24 - 48 - 115 - 220
Maximum consumptions inrush/hold
AC 1P VA 900/120 900/120 1500/175
2P VA 900/120 1500/175 2000/127
3P VA 900/120 1500/175 2000/127
4P VA 1500/175 2000/127 2000/127
DC 1P W 36 36 36
2P W 36 36 43
3P W 36 36
4P W 36 43
L/R constant of electromagnet open/closed ms
Closing time at Un ms 25/45 35/60 65/60
at 0.85 Un ms
Opening time at Un ms
between command and
- separation of contacts ms 45 45 45
- total opening of electromagnet ms
- complete opening ms 300 300 300
(1) in open air. •Temperature factor to be applied to the poles or the current controlled
(2) motor 1500 rpm: according to the ambient temperature (around the contactor):
30 operations/h: long start-up,
120 operations/h: short start-up. 1.04 40 < t < 45°C
(3) for C type contacts; for M type contacts values are as follows: 1.08 45 < t < 50°C
1.12 50 < t < 55°C
Calibres kA eff
1.19 55 < t < 60°C
80 1
150 1.75 •Factor to be applied to the contactor for poles connected in parallel, this
200 2.75 factor already includes a safety margin:
(4) for M and C type contacts, consult us.
2 poles in parallel 3 poles in parallel
(5) 1st figure: CBA contactor,
2nd figure: CBPA contactor. AC I.th 1 pole x 2 x 0.7 I.th 1 pole x 3 x 0.66
* possible blowout calibration: •The current switch-off rating of poles connected in parallel remains the
CB 80 A: 1-2-3-4-6-10-16-25-40 A. same as for a single pole.
CB 150 A: 1-2-3-4-6-10-16-25-40-80 A.
CB 200 A: 1-2-3-4-6-10-16-25-40-80-150 A.
34
CB 80 to 200 A, multipolarversions
Technical featuresCBC57 B - CBFC55 80 to 200 A
DCcontactors
Ue up to 500 VÜ
Standards IEC947-4-1 80 * 150 * 200 *

Thermal nominal current(1) DC_1 A 100 250 320
Nominal insulation voltage V 1000 1000 1000
DC V 500(2) 500(2) 500(2)
Maximum controlledpowers
DC voltage V 220/250 440/500 220/250 440/500 220/250 440/500
DC_2 - DC_4 duties kW 22 44 45 90 66 132
Maximum currents of use
Short-time current, t :,: 40°C
1s kA 1 1.75 2.5
5s kA 0.5 0.8 1.15
10 s kA 0.35 0.57 0.81
15 s kA 0.3 0.51 0.7
30 s kA 0.23 0.42 0.56
1 min kA 0.19 0.31 0.43
3 min kA 0.14 0.3 0.4
10 min kA 0.12 0.26 0.35
Allowable overcurrent/time
DC kA/s 1/1 1.75/1 2.5/1(3)
DC voltage V 500 500 500
L/R = 15 ms kA 0.7(4) 0.8(4) 3.5(4)
DC L/R = 15 ms kA 0.7(4) 0.8(4) 3.5(4)
Mechanical endurance millions of 3.5/10(5) 3.5/10(5) 3.5/10(5)
operations
Control circuit
Nominal voltages AC, 50 Hz V
DC V
AC 1P VA 900/120 900/120 1500/175
2P VA 900/120 1500/175 2000/127
3P VA 900/120 1500/175 2000/127
4P VA 1500/175 2000/127 2000/127
DC 1P W 36 36 36
2P W 36 36 43
3P W 36 36
4P W 36 43
L/R constant of electromagnet open/closed ms
Closing time at Un ms 25/45 35/60 35/60
at 0.85 Un ms
between command and
- total opening of electromagnet ms
(2) for voltage of use greater then 500 V, consult us. according to the ambient temperature (around the contactor):
(3) for C contacts; for M type contacts values are as follows:
1.04 40 < t < 45°C
Calibres kA eff 1.08 45 < t < 50°C
80 1 1.12 50 < t < 55°C
150 1.75 1.19 55 < t < 60°C
200 2.75
(4) for M and C type contacts, consult us. •Factor to be applied to the contactor for poles connected in parallel, this
(5) 1st figure: CBA contactor, factor already includes a safety margin:
2nd figure: CBPA contactor.
* possible blowout calibration:
DC I.th 1 pole x 2 x 0.8 I.th 1 pole x 3 x 0.75
CB 80 A: 1-2-3-4-6-10-16-25-40 A,
CB 150 A: 1-2-3-4-6-10-16-25-40-80 A,
•CB 200 A: 1-2-3-4-6-10-16-25-40-80-150 A. The current switch-off rating of poles connected in parallel remains the same
as for a single pole.
35
Overall dimensionsCBA 55 - CBFC55 80 A
8. CBA 55 - CBFC 55 80
PC
M PC C2 ØK
52,5
B3 15 25 25 15
M
N
B
Ø9
B2
B1
ØK V
C C1
PF
E
Metallic Insulated B 155.5

walls walls B1 101
M N M N B2 93
220 V CBA 30 30 30 25 B3 48
CBFC 55 45 45 35 C 122
500 V CBA 55 40 40 30 C1 27
CBFC 110 80 90 65 C2 30
ØK M6
Pole equipped with silver contact.
PF: attachment plane.
M: M type auxiliary contact blocks (D blocks on request). V: possible mechanical locking, attachment centre-to-centre dis-
PC: contactor pole. tance between 2 superimposed contactors: 250 mm.
Number Type Voltage E distance in mm, version without locking possibility

of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBA 220-500 A B-D C E F
CBFC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
2 CBA 220-500 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
3 CBA 220-500 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
4 CBA 220-500 A B D C-E F
500 A B-D C E F
Number Type Voltage E distance in mm, version with locking possibility

of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBA 220-500 A B-D C E F
CBFC 220 A B-D C E F
500 A B D C E F
2 CBA 220-500 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
3 CBA 220-500 A B-D C E F
500 A B-D C E F
4 CBA 220-500 A B D C-E F
500 A B-D C E F
In each calibre and for each type, 6 versions are possible:

3 versions without TP 86 delayed auxiliarycontacts. 3 versions with one TP 86 block, with 2 delayed auxiliary con-
Version A: without M instant auxiliary contact block. tacts, i.e. 1 NO + 1 NC.
Version B: with one M block with 3 instant contacts, Version D: without M instant auxiliary contact block.
i.e. 2 NO + 1 NC. Version E: with one M block with 3 instant contacts,
Version C: with 2 M blocks each one with 3 instant contacts, i.e. 2 NO + 1 NC.
i.e. 4 NO + 2 NC. Version F: with 2 M blocks each one with 3 instant contacts,
i.e. 4 NO + 2 NC.
36
Overall dimensionsCBPA 57 - CBC57 B 80 A
9. CBPA 57 - CBC 57 B 80
PC
M PC C2 ØK
F F
52,5
B3 15 25 25 15
M
N
B
Ø9
B2
B1
ØK V 15
51 C3 C C1 37
PF
G E
Metallic Insulated B 155,5

walls walls B1 101
M N M N B2 93
220 V CBPA 30 30 30 25 B3 48
CBC 55 45 45 35 C 122
500 V CBPA 55 40 40 30 C1 27
CBC 110 80 90 65 C2 30
ØK M6
F G
CM 62 77 108 M: M type auxiliary contact blocks (D blocks on request).
CM 63 95 120 PC: contactor pole.
CM 64 110 130 PF: attachment plane.
V: possible mechanical locking, attachment centre-to-centre dis-
Pole equipped with silver contact.
tance between 2 superimposed contactors: 250 mm.
C3: attachment bar 30 x 21 = 34,
attachment bar 44 x 24 = 37.

of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBPA 220-500 A B D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B-D C-E F
2 CBPA 220-500 A B-D C-E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C-E F
3 CBPA 220-500 A B D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
4 CBPA 220-500 A B D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F

of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBPA 220-500 A B D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
2 CBPA 220-500 A B D C-E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
3 CBPA 220-500 A B D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
4 CBPA 220-500 A B D C-E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F

3 versions without TP 86 delayed auxiliary contacts. 3 versions with one TP 86 block, with 2 delayed auxiliary con-
i.e. 4 NO + 2 NC.
37
10. CBA 55 - CBFC 55 150
PC
M PC C2 ØK
52,5
B3 15 25 25 15
M
N
B
Ø9
B2
B1
ØK V
C C1
PF
E

walls walls B1 112
M N M N B2 102
220 V CBA 35 30 20 20 B3 61
CBFC 105 75 85 60 C 158
500 V CBA 40 30 30 25 C1(1) 29
CBFC 125 95 105 75 C2(1) 33
Pole equipped with copper contact (silver on request).
ØK M8
PC: contactor pole. tance between 2 superimposed contactors: 250 mm.
PF: attachment plane. (1) support bar: 44 x 24.
C1 = 30.5,
C2 = 34.5.

of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBA 220-500 A B D C E F
CBFC 220-500 A B D C E F
2 CBA 220 A B D C E F
500 A B-D C-E F
CBFC 220 A B-D C-E F
500 A B-D C E F
500 A B D C E F
500 A B-D C E F
500 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F

of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBA 220-500 A B D C E F
CBFC 220-500 A B D C E F
500 A B-D C-E F
CBFC 220 A B-D C-E F
500 A B-D C E F
500 A B D C E F
500 A B-D C E F
500 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
3 versions without TP 86 delayed auxiliary contacts. 3 versions with one TP 86 block, with 2 delayed auxiliary con-
i.e. 4 NO + 2 NC.
38
11. CBPA 57 - CBC 57 B 150
PC
M PC C2 ØK
F F
52,5
B3 15 25 25 15
M
N
B
Ø9
B2
B1
ØK V 15
51 C3 C 37
C1
G PF E

walls walls B1 112
M N M N B2 102
220 V CBPA 30 30 20 20 B3 61
CBC 105 75 85 60 C 158
500 V CBPA 40 30 30 25 C1(1) 29
CBC 125 95 105 75 C2(1) 33
ØK M8
F G
CM 62 77 108 M: M type auxiliary contact blocks (D blocks on request).
CM 63 95 120 PC: contactor pole.
V: possible mechanical locking, attachment centre-to-centre dis-
Pole equipped with silver contact on request. tance between 2 superimposed contactors: 250 mm.
(1) support bar: 44 x 24.
C3: attachment bar: 30 x 21 = 34, C1 = 30.5,
attachment bar: 44 x 24 = 37. C2 = 34.5.

of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBPA 220-500 A B-D C-E F
CBC 220-500 A B-D C-E F
2 CBPA 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
3 CBPA 220 A B C-D E F
500 A B D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
4 CBPA 220 A B-D C E F
500 A B D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B-D C E F
of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBPA 220-500 A B D C-E F
CBC 220-500 A B D C-E F
500 A B-D C E F
CBC 220 A B-D C E F
500 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
4 CBPA 220 A B-D C-E F
500 A B D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B-D C E F
In each calibre and for each type, 6 versions are possible: 3 versions with one TP 86 block, with 2 delayed auxiliary con-
3 versions without TP 86 delayed auxiliary contacts. tacts, i.e. 1 NO + 1 NC.
Version A: without M instant auxiliary contact block. Version D: without M instant auxiliary contact block.
Version B: with one M block with 3 instant contacts, Version E: with one M block with 3 instant contacts,
i.e. 2 NO + 1 NC. i.e. 2 NO + 1 NC.
Version C(1): with 2 M blocks each one with 3 instant contacts, Version F(1): with 2 M blocks each one with 3 instant contacts,
i.e. 4 NO + 2 NC. i.e. 4 NO + 2 NC.
(1) for CBC 57 B 150 contactor, 4 poles, 1 NC contact is used for inserting
the economy resistor..
39
12. CBA 55 - CBFC 55 200
PC
M PC C2 ØK
52,5
B3 15 25 25 15
M
N
B
Ø
B2
B1
ØK V
C C1
PF
E
Metallic Insulated B 235

walls walls B1 120
M N M N B2 107
220 V CBA 30 25 30 20 B3 103
CBFC 165 135 130 105 C 211
500 V CBA 65 45 50 35 C1 32
CBFC 235 175 175 145 C2 37
Pole equipped with copper contact, silver on request.
ØK M10
PC: contactor pole tance between 2 superimposed contactors: 250 mm.
Support bar: 44 x 24.
Ø: 13 mm for bar 44 x 24..

of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBA 220-500 A B D C E F
CBFC 220-500 A B-D C E F
500 A B-D C E F
500 A B D C E F
500 A B-D C E F
500 A B-D C E F
4 CBA 220 A B-D C-E F
500 A B-D C E F
500 A B-D C E F

of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBA 220-500 A B D C E F
CBFC 220-500 A B-D C E F
500 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F
500 A B-D C E F
500 A B-D C-E F
500 A B-D C E F
500 A B-D C E F

i.e. 4 NO + 2 NC.
40
13. CBPA 57 - CBC 57 B 200
PC
M PC C2 ØK
F F
52,5
B3 15 25 25 15
M
N
B
Ø
B2
B1
ØK V 15
51 37 C C1 37
G PF
E
Metallic Insulated B 235

walls walls B1 120
M N M N B2 107
220 V CBPA 30 25 30 20 B3 103
CBC 165 135 130 105 C 211
500 V CBPA 65 45 50 35 C1 32
CBC 235 175 175 145 C2 37
H
F G ØK M10
CM 63 95 120
PC: contactor pole.
Pole equipped with silver contact on request. V: possible mechanical locking, attachment centre-to-centre dis-
tance between 2 superimposed contactors: 250 mm.
M: M type auxiliary contact blocks (D blocks on request). Support bar: 44 x 24.
Ø: 13 mm for bar 44 x 24.

of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBPA 220-500 A B D-C E F
CBC 220-500 A B D C E F
500 A B-D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F

of poles of use 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750
1 CBPA 220-500 A B D C E F
CBC 220-500 A B D C E F
500 A B-D C E F
CBC 220 A B D C E F
500 A B D C E F

Version C: with 2 M blocks each one with 3 intant contacts, i.e. 2 NO + 1 NC(1).
i.e. 4 NO + 2 NC.(2).
(1) for CBC 57 B 200 contactor, 2 poles: 2 NO free auxiliary contacts as 1 NC
contact is used for inserting the economy resistor.
(2) CBC 57 B 200 contactor, 2 poles: 4 NO + 1 NC free auxiliary contacts as
1 NC contact is used for inserting the economy resistor.
41
CB 75 400 to 1000 A
2 types for each calibr e:
AC poles
CBA 75 400,
CBA 75 500,
CBA 75 630,
CBA 75 800,
CBA 75 1000.
DC poles
CBFC75 400,
CBFC75 500,
CBFC75 630,
CBFC75 800,
CBFC75 1000.
CBA 75 1000 4.0

Reinforced insulation
Standard versions Options
■ 1 to 4 single pin main poles with silver pad contacts. ■ NO or NC delayed block, TP 86 type (this one also inclu-
des 4 free instant contacts, i.e. 3 NO + 1NF).
■ Closing electromagnet mounted on the right side of the
poles, (on request, it can be mounted on the left) and ■ Addition of D type and M type auxiliary contact blocks
laminated magnetic circuit. according to different versions.
- control circuit supplied from an AC source:
• for calibres 400 (1 to 4 poles), 500 and 630 (1 to ■ Device to hold the contactor closed in case of untimely
2 poles), without economy resistor. micro-cuts for contactors that are not equipped with a
• over, rectified and power-saved current via a rectifier mechanical latching.
mounted on the contactor.
- control circuit supplied from a DC source: power-saved ■ Mechanical latching with single or double electrical
circuit with economy resistor. release.
■ Mechanical locking: vertical type. ■ Self-protective device for the release coil(s).
■ Metallic support for ‘Ronis type’ lock (lock not supplied).

Auxiliary contacts
■ Horizontal or back-to-back mechanical locking.
■ 2 NO + 2 NC available on D blocks on the whole range
(2 extra D blocks can be mounted on request). ■ Poles of different calibres and supplied with different cur-
rents.
■ Control circuit supplied from an AC source: one M block,
form F2.01Y, on calibres 500 and 630, from 3 to 4 poles
and on calibres 800 and 1000; from 1 pole as control cir-
cuit is rectified and coil power-saved via 1 NC overlap
contact, 1 NO + 1 NC free auxiliary contacts.
■ Control circuit supplied from a DC source: on the whole

range, one block type F2.01Y with one NC overlap con-
tact for inserting the economy resistor and 1 NO + 1 NC
free auxiliary contacts.
43
CB75 400 to 1000 A
Technical featuresCBA 75 400 to 1000 A
AC contactors
Ue up to 1000 V, 50/60 Hz
Standards: IEC 947-4-1

Alternating current CBA Type 75
400 500 630 800 1000
Thermal nominal current(1) AC_1 A 500/500 500/500 630/630 800/800 1000/1000
Current of use frequency limitations Hz 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60 50 - 60
Nominal insulating voltage V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
connecting section mm2 240 300 400 500 600
Nominal operating voltage, 40 to 60 Hz(4) V 660 1000(6) 660 1000(6) 660 1000(6) 660 1000(6) 660 1000(6)
Maximum controlled powers
voltage V 220 380 500/660 220 380 500/660 220 380 500/660 220 380 500/660 220 380 500/660
AC’2 - AC_3 duty cycle kW 110 220 220 150 250 250 160 250 250 220 440 440 220 440 440
AC_23 duty cycle kVA 170 290 350 170 290 350 210 360 490 275 475 620 340 590 780
Short-time current, t ::: 40°C
1s kA 10 12 14 24 26
5s kA 4.5 5.75 6.5 11 12.5
10 s kA 3.25 4 4.5 7.8 8.5
15 s kA 2.7 3.4 3.8 6.5 7
30 s kA 1.9 2.4 2.7 4.6 5
1 min kA 1.4 1.78 2 3.3 3.65
3 min kA 0.88 1.1 1.3 2 2.3
10 min kA 0.62 0.79 0.92 1.38 1.6
Nominal thermal current under 400 Hz A 380 380 480 640 800
Allowable overcurrent time kAeff/s 4.5/5 5.75/5 6.5/5 11/5 12.5/5
operating voltage V 500 660 1000 500 660 1000 500 660 1000 500 660 1000 500 660 1000
cos (f) = 0.3 kA eff 6.5 6 2.5 8.5 8 3.3 8.5 8 3.3 12 12 7.5 12 12 7.5
Current switch-on rating cos (f) = 0.3 kA eff 6.5 8.5 8.5 12 12
Mechanical endurance millions of operations 3 3 3 3 3
Control circuit
Nominal voltageAC, 50 Hz V 24 - 48 - 110 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 500
DC V 24 - 48 - 115 - 220 - 440 - 500
AC(2) 1P VA 2000/175 2000/175 2000/175 500/30 500/30
2P VA 2000/175 2000/225 2500/225 500/30 500/30
3P VA 2000/175 525/30 525/30 750/66 750/66
4P VA 2000/175 525/30 525/30 750/66 750/66
DC 1P W 400/26 400/26 400/26 500/30 500/30
2P W 400/26 525/30 525/30 500/30 500/30
3P W 400/26 525/30 525/30 750/66 750/66
4P W 525/30 525/30 525/30 750/66 750/66
Average time of operation at nominal voltage(5)

Constant L/R rate of electromagnet open/closed
Closing time at Un AC ms 40 40 40
DC ms 90 90 90 120 120
Opening time at Un between command and separation of contacts
AC ms 20 20 20
DC ms 25 25 25 38 38
(1) in open air. •Arcing time depends on the circuit controlled by the main contacts. In
(2) bold type ratings: rectified and power-saved control circuit voltage. three-phase current, arcing time is normally inferior to 15 ms. The receiver
(3) diodes are warranted up to a network overload of 3 Un efficient. is insulated from the network after a time corresponding to the opening
(4) if nominal operation voltage > 1000 V, please consult us. time plus the arcing time.
(5) closing time is measured from the supply of the closing coil until the con-
tact of main poles. Opening time is measured from the supply of the trip- •Factor to be applied to the contactor for poles connected in parallel, this
ping coil until the separation of main poles. factor already includes a safety margin:
(6) reinforced insulation for use under 1000 V, please specify it when you
order. 2 poles in parallel 3 poles in parallel
AC I.th 1 pole x 2 x 0.7 I.th 1 pole x 3 x 0.66
Temperature factor to be applied to the poles or the current (controlled
according to the ambient temparature (around the contactor):
•The current switch-off rating of poles connected in parallel remains the
1.04 40 < t < 45°C same as for a single pole.
1.08 45 < t ::: 50°C
• Maximum consumptions:
1.12 50 < t ::: 55°C
1.19 55 < t ::: 60°C Bold type ratings:
- AC: control circuit is supplied with rectified and power-saved current via a
rectifier mounted on the contactor(3).
- DC: control circuit is power-saved.
For technical features of opening poles, see p. 70.
44
CB75 400 to 1000 A
Technical featuresCBFC75 400 to 1000 A
DC contactors
Ue up to 2000 VÜ
Standards: IEC 947-4-1

Direct current CBFC Type 75
400 500 630 800 1000
Thermal nominal current(1) DC_1 A 500/500 500/500 630/630 800/800 1000/1000
Nominal insulating voltage V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
connecting section mm2 240 300 400 500 600
Nominal operating voltage V 500 1000(6) 500 1000(6) 500 1000(6) 500 1000(6) 500 1000(6)
voltage V 220/250 440/500 220/250 440/500 220/250 440/500 220/250 440/500 220/250 440/500
DC’2 - DC_4 duty cycle kW 90 180 110 220 110 220 175 350 175 350
Short-time current, t o;; 40°C
1s kA 10 12 14 24 26
5s kA 4.5 5.75 6.5 11 12.5
10s kA 3.25 4 4.5 7.8 8.5
15s kA 2.7 3.4 3.8 6.5 7
30s kA 1.9 2.4 2.7 4.6 5
1 min kA 1.4 1.78 2 3.3 3.65
3 min kA 0.88 1.1 1.3 2 2.3
10 min kA 0.62 0.79 0.92 1.38 1.6
Allowable overcurrent / time kAeff/s 4.5/5 5.75/5 6.5/5 11/5 12.5/5
Current switch-off rating L/R = 15 ms
voltage applied V 500 700 1000 500 700 1000 500 700 1000 500 700 1000 500 700 1000
single-pole kA 6 8 8 19 19
two-pole(6) kA 6 5 10 7 10 7 17 10 17 10
voltage applied V 1500 1800 2000 1500 1800 2000 1500 1800 2000 1500 1800 2000 1500 1800 2000
three-pole(6) kA 5 2 1.5 7 2.5 2.5 7 2.5 2.5 10 8 6 10 8 6
four-pole(6) kA 5 7 7 10 10
Current switch-on rating L/R = 15 ms kA 6/500 V 10.5/500 V 10.5/500 V 19/500 V 19/500 V
Mechanical endurance millions of operations 3 3 3 3 3
Control circuit
Nominal voltageAC, 50 Hz V 24 - 48 - 110 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 500
DC V 24 - 48 - 115 - 220 - 440 - 500
AC(2) 1P VA 2000/175 2000/175 2000/175 500/30 500/30
2P VA 2000/175 2000/225 2500/225 500/30 500/30
3P VA 2000/175 525/30 525/30 750/66 750/66
4P VA 2000/175 525/30 525/30 750/66 750/66
DC 1P W 400/26 400/26 400/26 500/30 500/30
2P W 400/26 525/30 525/30 500/30 500/30
3P W 400/26 525/30 525/30 750/66 750/66
4P W 525/30 525/30 525/30 750/66 750/66
Average time of operation at nominal voltage(4)

Constant L/R rate of electromagnet open/closed
Closing time at Un AC ms 40 40 40
DC ms 90 90 90 120 120
Opening time at Un between command and separation of contacts
AC ms 20 20 20
DC ms 25 25 25 38 38
(1) in open air. •Factor to be applied to the contactor for poles connected in parallel, this
(2) bold type ratings: rectified and power-saved control circuit voltage. factor already includes a safety margin:
(3) diodes are warranted up to a network overload of 3 Un efficient.
(4) closing time is measured from the time of supply of the closing coil until 2 poles in parallel 3 poles in parallel
the time of contact of the main poles. Opening time is measured from DC I.th 1 pole x 2 x 0.8 I.th 1 pole x 3 x 0.75
the time of supply of the tripping coil until the time of separation of the
main poles. •The current switch-off rating of poles connected in parallel remains the
(5) dielectric testing voltage according to insulation voltage can reach 8 kV same as for a single pole.
for specific applications.
(6) for applications with Ue > 500 V, please consult our technical depart- • Maximum consumptions:
ment to select the contactor (specific dimensions and insulation). Bold type ratings:
- AC: control circuit is supplied with rectified and power-saved current via a
•Temperature factor to be applied to the poles or the current controlled rectifier mounted on the contactor(3).
according to the ambient temperature (around the contactor): - DC: control circuit is power-saved.
1.04 40 < t < 45°C For technical features of opening poles, see p. 70.
1.08 45 < t o;; 50°C
1.12 50 < t o;; 55°C
1.19 55 < t o;; 60°C
45
CB75 400 to 1000 A
Overall dimensionsCBA & CBFC75 400 to 1000 A
Standard AC & DC contactors
CBA: Ue up to 1000 V, 50-60 Hz - CBFC: Ue 500 VÜÜÜÜ
14. CBA - CBFC75 400 to 1000
TP D M
4 x Ø 11
H2
H3
CM 200
AV
10 H1
L1 L2 L2 L2 22,5 P
12,5 A 12,5
AV: mechanical locking axis, attachment center-to-center dis- CM: magnetic circuit can be mounted on the left side of the con-
tance between 2 superimposed contactors: tactor. Without any information, it will always be mounted on the
- 400 mm with below contactor of 400, 500 and 600 A calibre, right.
- 575 mm with below contactor of 800 or 1000 A calibre. D: D type auxiliary contact blocks.
TP: delayed auxiliary contact block.
Please advise when you order whether the contactor has to be
equipped with the «shaft end» - necessary to adapt a possible
mechanical locking device.
Without information, the contactor will be delivered without it
Dimensions
A Safety
Calibres H1 H2 H3(1) without delayedcontact with delayedcontact L1 L2 P perimeter(2)
1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P M N
400 38 75 105 250 325 400 450 325 400 475 525 43.5 68 278 45 45
500/630 38 75 105 250 350 425 500 325 425 500 575 45 80 278 75 60
800/1000 33 149 112 325 400 500 600 400 475 575 675 66 92 315 185 85
(1) for equipment with DC supplied or rectified AC supplied coil.
(2) with metallic walls. .
Connecting sections
■ Calibres 400 and 500/630 ■ Calibres 800/1000

8 25
25
12
2
40
25 25
12
68
25
16
200
TF
TF
200
Ø 12 32
50
28
Ø8
10
23
AP 50
10
PF
12,5 12,5
20
AP PF
AP: pole axis.

TF: fixation holes.
For control circuit, see P. 144
46
15. CBA - CBFC 75 400 x.0(2)
PG TP R M Disp ACC D PC connecting sections
M M + M Metallic walls
6 25
45
105 118
22.5 75
15 (3) 13 40
25
37.5 37.5
14
45
V AV 200 200
125
CM 16 R 10 TF
125
37.5
38
52.5 30 141 PC
32 37.5
20 Ø 12
12.5 L1 68 68 S 12.5 258
28
CB 75 400 to 1000 A
CBA: Ue up to 1000 V, 50/60 Hz - CBFC: Ue 500 VÜ
Overall dimensionsCBA & CBFC75 400 A

Modular AC & DC contactors
10 20
A
∆
LEN version: z = A + 105 mm or more on request AP 50
LER version: z = A + 25 mm (reduced dimensions) PF
Contactor without «mechanical latching with electrical and manual release» ACC: mechanical latching with
single or double release.
A dimension locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) AP: pole axis.
(mm) without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact AV: mechanical locking axis,
Number of attachment centre-to-centre dis-
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 tance between two superimposed
M type blocks contactors:
1 250 300 300 350 350 400 325 375 375 425 425 475 300 350 350 400 400 450 375 425 425 475 475 525 - 400 mm with below contactor
Number
of poles
of calibre 400, 500 and 630 A,

47
2 325 375 375 425 425 475 400 450 450 500 500 550 375 425 425 475 475 525 450 500 500 550 550 600
3 400 450 450 500 500 550 475 525 525 575 575 625 450 475 475 525 525 575 500 550 550 600 600 650 - 575 mm with below contactor
of calibre 800 or 1000 A.
4 450 500 500 550 550 600 525 575 575 625 625 675 500 550 550 600 600 650 575 625 625 675 675 725 CM 16 R: magnetic circuit can be
mounted on the left side of the
contactor. Without any informa-
tion, it will always be mounted on
Contactor with «mechanical latching with single electrical and manual release» the right.
A dimension locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) D: D type auxiliary contact blocks.
(mm) Disp + M: device used for DC or
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact rectified AC control circuit. Stand-
Number of 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 ard contents: one support with
M type blocks terminal box, economy resistor(s),
rectifier for alternating current and
Number
1 350 375 375 425 425 475 400 450 450 500 500 550 375 425 425 475 475 525 450 500 500 550 550 600
of poles
one M type auxiliary contact block.

2 400 450 450 500 500 550 475 525 525 575 575 625 450 500 500 550 550 600 525 575 575 625 625 675 L1: - without locking possibility
3 475 525 525 575 575 625 550 600 600 650 650 700 525 575 575 625 625 675 600 650 650 700 700 750 on the left extremity: 45 mm,
- with locking possibility on
the left extremity: 90 mm.
Contactor with «mechanical latching with double electrical and manual release» M: M type auxiliary contact
A dimension locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) blocks(1).
(mm) PC: closing pole.
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact
PF: attachment plane, LERversion.
Number of 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 PG: left bearing.
M type blocks R: possible auxiliary relays.
1 425 450 450 500 500 550 475 525 525 575 575 625 450 500 500 550 550 600 525 575 575 625 625 675 S: metallic support for «Ronis
Number
of poles
2 475 525 525 575 575 625 550 600 600 650 650 700 525 575 575 575 575 675 600 650 650 700 700 750 type» lock for locking the contac-
tor at rest (lock not supplied).
3 550 600 600 650 650 700 625 675 675 725 725 775 600 650 650 700 700 750 675 725 725 775 775 825 TF: attachment holes.
4 625 675 675 725 725 775 700 750 750 800 800 850 675 700 700 750 750 800 725 775 775 825 825 875 TP: delayed auxiliary contact
block.
(1) form to be specified. Please advise when you order whether the contactor has to be V: possible mechanical locking
(2) X is the number of closing poles.
equipped with the «shaft end» - necessary to adapt a possible facility with a 80, 150, 200 and
(3) for contactor equipped with DC or rectified AC supplied coil. 1250 to 5000 A contactor or with
∆ for LEN version, please advise the position of the contactor on the bar. mechanical locking device. CBA-CBFC 55 400 to 1000 A old
Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p. 144 Without information, the contactor will be delivered without it. generation contactors.
16. CBA - CBFC 75 500 and 630 x.0(4)
PG TP R M Disp ACC D PC connecting sections
M M + M Metallic walls
75
8 25
118
105 75
22.5
15 (5)
12 40
25
37.5
14
60 37.5
V AV 200 200
125
CM
10
TF
125
37.5
38
52.5 30 141 PC
12.5 L1 80 80 20 37.5
S 12.5 258 Ø 12 32
EncombrementsCBA et CBFC75 500 et 630 A

CB75 400 to 1000 A
CBA: Ue up to 1000 V, 50/60 Hz - CBFC: Ue 500 VÜ
Modular AC & DCcontactors
28
A
10 20
LEN version: z = A + 105 mm or more on request ∆
AP 50
LER version: z = A + 25 mm (reduced dimensions)
PF
Contactor without «mechanical latching with electrical and manual release» ACC: mechanical latching with
single or double release.
A dimension locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) AP: pole axis.
(mm) without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact AV: mechanical locking axis, atta-
chment centre-to-centre distance
Number of 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 between two superimposed con-
M type blocks tactors:
1 275(2) 300(2) 300(2) 350(2) 350(2) 400(2) 325(2) 375(2) 375(2) 425(2) 425(2) 475(2) 300(2) 350(2) 350(2) 400(2) 400(2) 450(2) 375(2) 425(2) 425(2) 475(2) 475(2) 525(2) - 400 mm with below contactor
Number
of poles
of calibre 400, 500 and 630 A,

48
2 350(2) 400(2) 400(2) 450(2) 450(2) 500(2) 400(2) 450(2) 450(2) 500(2) 500(2) 550(2) 400(2) 425(2) 425(2) 475(2) 475(2) 525(2) 450(2) 500(2) 500(2) 550(2) 550(2) 600(2) - 575 mm with below contactor
3 425(2) 475(2) 475(2) 525(2) 525(2) 575(2) 500(2) 550(2) 550(2) 600(2) 600(2) 650(3) 475(2) 525(2) 525(2) 575(2) 575(2) 625(2) 525(2) 575(2) 575(2) 625(2) 625(2) 675(2) of calibre 800 or 1000 A.
4 500(2) 550(2) 575(3) 625(3) 625(3) 675(3) 600(3) 650(3) 650(3) 700(3) 700(3) 750(3) 550(2) 600(2) 625(3) 675(3) 675(3) 725(3) 650(3) 700(3) 700(3) 750(3) 750(3) 800(3) CM: magnetic circuit can be
mounted on the left side of the
Contactor with «mechanical latching with single electrical and manual release» contactor. Without any informa-
tion, it will always be mounted on
A dimension locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) the right.
(mm) without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact D: D type auxiliary contact blocks.
Number of Disp + M: device used for DC or
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 rectified AC control circuit. Stan-
M type blocks dard contents: one support with
1 350(2) 400(2) 400(2) 450(2) 450(2) 500(2) 400(2) 450(2) 450(2) 500(2) 500(2) 550(2) 400(2) 425(2) 425(2) 475(2) 475(2) 525(2) 450(2) 500(2) 500(2) 550(2) 550(2) 600(2) terminal box, economy resistor(s),
Number
of poles
2 rectifier for alternating current and

425(2) 475(2) 475(2) 525(2) 525(2) 575(2) 500(2) 550(2) 550(2) 600(2) 600(2) 650(2) 475(2) 525(2) 525(2) 575(2) 575(2) 625(2) 525(2) 575(2) 575(2) 625(2) 625(2) 675(2) one M type auxiliary contact
3 500(2) 550(2) 550(2) 600(2) 600(2) 650(2) 575(2) 625(2) 625(2) 675(2) 675(2) 725(2) 550(2) 600(2) 600(2) 650(2) 650(2) 700(2) 625(2) 675(2) 675(2) 725(2) 725(2) 775(2) block.
4 575(2) 650(3) 650(3) 700(3) 700(3) 750(2) 675(3) 725(3) 725(3) 775(3) 775(3) 825(2) 625(2) 700(3) 700(3) 750(3) 750(3) 800(3) 700(3) 750(3) 750(3) 800(3) 800(3) 850(3) L1: - without locking possibility
on the left extremity: 45 mm,
Contactor with «mechanical latching with double electrical and manual release» - with locking possibility on
A dimension locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) M: M type auxiliary contact
(mm) without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact blocks(1).
Number of PC: closing pole.
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 PF: attachment plane, LERversion.
M type blocks
PG: left bearing.
1 425 475 475 525 525 575 475 525 525 575 575 625(2)
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) 475(2) 500(2) 500(2) 550(2) 550(2) 600(2) 525(2) 575(2) 575(2)
675(2) 625(2) 625(2) R: possible auxiliary relays.
Number
of poles
2 500(2) 550(2) 550(2) 600(2) 600(2) 650(2) 575(2) 625(2) 625(2) 675(2) 675(2) 725(2) 550(2) 600(2) 600(2) 650(2) 650(2) 700(2) 600(2) 650(2) 650(2) 700(2) 700(2) 750(2) S: metallic support for «Ronis
3 575(2) 625(2) 625(2) 675(2) 675(2) 725(2) 650(2) 700(2) 700(2) 750(2) 750(2) 800(2) 625(2) 675(2) 675(2) 725(2) 725(2) 775(2) 700(2) 750(2) 750(2) 800(2) 800(2) 850(2) type» lock for locking the contac-
4 650(2) 725(3) 725(3) 775(3) 775(3) 825(3) 750(3) 800(3) 800(3) 850(3) 850(3) 900(3) 700(2) 775(3) 775(3) 825(3) 825(3) 875(3) 775(3) 825(3) 825(3) 875(3) 875(3) 925(3) TF: attachment holes.
(1) form to be specified. TP: delayed auxiliary contact
(2) magnetic circuit n° 16 R. block.
(3) magnetic circuit n° 18. Please advise when you order whether the contactor has to be
(4) X is the number of closing poles. equipped with the «shaft end» - necessary to adapt a possible V: possible mechanical locking
(5) for contactor equipped with DC or rectified AC supplied coil. facility with a 80, 150, 200 and
∆ for LEN version, please advise the position of the contactor on the bar. mechanical locking device.
1250 to 5000 A contactor or with
Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p. 144. Without information, the contactor will be delivered without it. CBA-CBFC 55 400 to 1000 A old
generation contactors.
17. CBA - CBFC 75 800 and 1000 x.0(2)
Metallic walls PC connecting sections
PG TP R M Disp ACC D
185 25
M M + M 12
2
118 149
Ø 11 22.5 112 25
15 68
37.5 25
14 16
37.5
85
V AV 200 200
125
CM 18 10
TF
125
37.5
33
52.5 30 141 PC
50
L1 92 92 20
295 37.5
CB75 400 to 1000 A

S
CBA: Ue up to 1000 V, 50/60 Hz - CBFC: Ue up to 500 VÜ
Overall dimensionsCBA & CBFC75 800 and 1000 A

Modular AC & DC contactors
Ø8
12.5 12.5
A 23
LEN version: z = A + 105 mm or more on request ∆ 10
12.5 12.5
LER version: z = A + 25 mm (reduced dimensions) 20
AP PF
Contactor without «mechanical latching with electrical and manual release» ACC: mechanical latching with sin-
A dimension locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) gle or double release.
(mm) without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact AP: pole axis.
AV: mechanical locking axis, atta-
Number of 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 chment centre-to-centre distance
M type blocks between two superimposed con-
49
1 325 375 375 425 425 475 375 425 425 475 475 525 350 400 400 450 450 500 425 475 475 525 525 575 tactors:
Number
of poles
- 400 mm with below contactor of

2 400 450 450 500 500 550 475 525 525 575 575 625 450 475 475 525 525 575 500 550 550 600 600 650 calibre 400, 500 and 630 A,
3 500 550 550 600 600 650 575 625 625 675 675 725 525 575 575 625 625 675 600 650 650 700 700 750 - 575 mm with below contactor of
4 600 650 • • • • 650 • • • • • 625 675 • • • • 700 • • • • • calibre 800 or 1000 A.
CM 18: magnetic circuit can be
Contactor with «mechanical latching with single electrical and manual release» mounted on the left side of the
contactor. Without any informa-
A dimension locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) tion, it will always be mounted on
(mm) without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact the right.
D: D type auxiliary contact blocks.
Number of 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Disp + M: device used for DC or
M type blocks rectified AC control circuit. Stan-
1 400 425 425 475 475 525 450 500 500 550 550 600 425 475 475 525 525 575 475 525 525 575 575 625 dard contents: one support with
Number
of poles
terminal box, economy resistor(s),

2 475 525 525 575 575 625 550 600 600 650 650 700 525 550 550 600 600 650 575 625 625 675 675 725 rectifier for alternating current and
3 575 625 625 675 675 725 650 700 700 750 750 800 600 650 650 700 700 750 675 725 725 775 775 825 one M type auxiliary contact block.
4 675 725 • • • • 725 • • • • • 700 750 • • • • 750 • • • • • L1: - without locking possibility on
the left extremity: 45 mm,
Contactor with «mechanical latching with double electrical and manual release» - with locking possibility on
A dimension locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) M: M type auxiliary contact blocks(1).
(mm) without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact PC: closing pole.
Number of PF: attachment plane, LERversion.
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 PG: left bearing.
M type blocks
R: possible auxiliary relays.
1 475 525 525 575 575 625 525 575 575 625 625 675 500 550 550 600 600 650 550 600 600 650 650 700
S: metallic support for «Ronis type»
Number
of poles
2 550 600 600 650 650 700 625 675 675 725 725 775 600 625 625 675 675 725 650 700 700 750 750 800 lock for locking the contactor at
3 650 700 700 750 750 800 725 775 775 825 825 875 675 725 725 775 775 825 750 800 800 850 850 900 rest (lock not supplied).
TF: attachment holes.
4 750 800 • • • • 800 • • • • • 775 825 • • • • 825 • • • • • TP: delayed auxiliary contact block.
• consult us. V: possible mechanical locking faci-
(1) form to be specified. Please advise when you order whether the contactor has to be lity with a 80, 150, 200 and
(2) X is the number of closing poles. equipped with the «shaft end» - necessary to adapt a possible
∆ for LEN version, please advise the position of the contactor on the bar. 1250 to 5000 A contactor or with
Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p. 144. mechanical locking device. CBA-CBFC 55 400 to 1000 A old
Without information, the contactor will be delivered without it. generation contactors.
18. CBFC 75 400 to 1000 2.0
PC connecting sections
PG PC TP R M Disp ACC D M Calibres 400/500/630 Calibres 800/1000
M M + M 25
C 15
12 2
22.5 H2 25
B 77,5 25
30 105,5
16 25
10 N
125
125 V AV Ø 12 125
125
CM 10
32 50
65,5 Ø8
H1 60,5
10
67.5 30 141 PC 10
AP 28
12,5 12,5
S P AP
L1 L2
CB75 400 to 1000 A

PF
Ue: 1000 VÜ
Overall dimensionsCBFC75 400 to 1000 A

Modular DC contactors, 2 poles, double insulation
PF
C = 6 for 400, B= 13 for 400,
A 8 for 500 / 630. 12 for 500 / 630.
ACC: mechanical latching with single or double

Contactor without «mechanical latching with electrical and manual release» release.
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) AP: pole axis.
A dimension (mm) AV: mechanical locking axis, attachment centre-to-
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact centre distance between two superimposed contac-
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 tors:
Number of poles 2 closing poles to beconnected in series - 400 mm with below contactor of calibre 400, 500,
and 630 A.
Calibre 400 A 400 450 450 500 500 475 525 525 575 575 450 475 475 525 525 500 550 550 600 600 - 575 mm with below contactor of calibre 800 or
Calibres 500 & 630 A 425 475 475 525 525 500 550 550 600 600 475 525 525 575 575 525 575 575 625 625 1000 A.
Calibres 800 & 1000 A 500* 550* 550* 600* 600* 575* 625* 625* 675* 675* 525* 575* 575* 625* 625* 600* 650* 650* 700* 700* CM: magnetic circuit can be mounted on the left side
50
of the contactor. Without any information, it will

always be mounted on the right.
Contactor with «mechanical latching with single electrical and manual release» D: D type auxiliary contact blocks.
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) Disp + M: device used for DC or rectified AC control
A dimension (mm) circuit. Standard contents: one support with terminal
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact box, economy resistor(s), rectifier for alternating cur-
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 rent and one M type auxiliary contact block.
Number of poles 2 closing poles to beconnected in series M: M type auxiliary contact blocks(1).
PC: closing pole.
Calibre 400 A 475 525 525 575 575 550 600 600 650 650 525 575 575 625 625 600 650 650 700 700 PF: attachement plane, LERversion.
Calibres 500 & 630 A 500 550 550 600 600 575 625 625 675 675 550 600 600 650 650 625 675 675 725 725 PG: left bearing.
Calibres 800 & 1000 A 575* 625* 625* 675* 675* 650* 700* 700* 750* 750* 600* 650* 650* 700* 700* 675* 725* 725* 775* 775* R: possible auxiliary relays.
S: metallic support for «Ronis type» lock for locking
the contactor at rest (lock not supplied).
Contactor with «mechanical latching with double electrical and manual release» TP: delayed auxiliary contact block.
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) V: possible mechanical locking facility with a 80, 150,
A dimension (mm) 200 and 1250 to 5000 A contactor or with CBA-
CBFC 55 400 to 1000 A old generation contactors.
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Number of poles 2 closing poles to beconnected in series L1 mechani-
cal locking Safety
Calibre 400 A 550 600 600 650 650 625 675 675 725 725 600 650 650 700 700 675 725 725 775 775 perimeter(2)
Calibres 500 & 630 A 575 625 625 675 675 650 700 700 750 750 625 675 675 725 725 700 750 750 800 800 Calibre possibility V L2
Calibres 800 & 1000 A 650* 700* 700* 750* 750* 725* 775* 775* 825* 825* 675* 725* 725* 775* 775* 750* 800* 800* 850* 850* with- with M N
out
∆ for LEN version, please advise the position of the contactor on the bar. 400 62 107 102 45 45
* magnetic circuit n° 18. 500/630 65 110 120 75 60
(1) form to bespecified.
(2) with metallic walls. Please advise when you order whether the contactor has to be 800/1000 89 118 138 185 85
Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p. 144. equipped with the «shaft end» - necessary to adapt a possible
Without information, the contactor will be delivered without it. Calibre H1 H2 P
400 75.5 112.5 258
500/630 75.5 112.5 258
800/1000 70.5 186.5 295
19. CBFC 75 400 to 1000 3.0
PG PC SE PC TP R M Disp AM D
M M + M M Calibres 400/500/630 Calibres 800/1000
25
C 15
12 2
PF PF
H2
30 25
B 77,5 25
105,5
16 25
10
N
V AV 125
125 125
CM Ø 12 125
10
32 50
H1 65,5 Ø8
60,5
67,5 30 141 PC 10
28 10
S P AP
L1 L2 L2 12,5 12,5
CB75 400 to 1000 A

Ue : 1000 VÜ

Modular DC contactors, 3 poles, double insulation.
PF AP PF
A
C = 6 for 400, B= 13 for 400,
Version LEN : z = A + 135 mm ou plus sur demande ∆ 8 for 500 / 630. 12 for 500 / 630.
A dimension (mm) AV: mechanical locking axis, attachment centre-to-
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact centre distance between two superimposed con-
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 tactors:
Number of poles 2 closing poles on the positive polarity to beconnected in seriesand 1 closing pole on the negative polarity - 400 mm with below contactor of calibre 400,
500, and 630 A.
Calibre 400 A 500 550 550 600 600 550 575 575 625 625 600 650 650 700 700 - 575 mm with below contactor of calibre 800 or
Calibres 500 & 630 A 550 600 600 650 650 600 650 650 700 700 600 625 625 675 675 650 700 700 750 750 1000 A.
51
Calibres 800 & 1000 A 650* 675* 675* 725* 725* 700* 750* 750* 800* 800* 675* 725* 725* 775* 775 725* 775* 775* 825* 825* CM: magnetic circuit can be mounted on the left
side of the contactor. Without any information, it
will always be mounted on the right.
Contactor with «mechanical latching with single electrical and manual release» D: D type auxiliary contact blocks.
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) Disp + M: device used for DC or rectified AC con-
A dimension (mm) trol circuit. Standard contents: one support with
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact terminal box, economy resistor(s), rectifier for alter-
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 nating current and one M type auxiliary contact
block.
Number of poles 2 closing poles on the positive polarity to beconnected in seriesand 1 closing pole on the negative polarity M: M type auxiliary contact blocks(1).
Calibre 400 A 575 625 625 675 675 650 700 700 750 750 625 675 675 725 725 700 750 750 800 800 PC: closing pole.
Calibres 500 & 630 A 625 675 675 725 725 700 750 750 800 800 675 725 725 775 775 725 775 775 825 825 PF: attachement plane, LERversion.
Calibres 800 & 1000 A 725* 750* 750* 800* 800* 775* 825* 825* 875* 875* 750* 800 800 850 850 800* 850* 850* 900* 900* PG: left bearing.
R: possible auxiliary relays.
Contactor with «mechanical latching with double electrical and manual release» the contactor at rest (lock not supplied).
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) SE: separator.
A dimension (mm) TP: delayed auxiliary contact block.
V: possible mechanical locking facility with a 80,
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 150, 200 and 1250 to 5000 A contactor or with
Number of poles 2 closing poles on the positive polarity to beconnected in seriesand 1 closing pole on the negative polarity CBA-CBFC 55 400 to 1000 A old generation con-
tactors.
Calibre 400 A 650 700 700 750 750 725 775 775 825 825 700 750 750 800 800 775 825 825 875 875
Calibres 500 & 630 A 700 750 750 800 800 775 825 825 875 875 750 800 800 850 850 800 850 850 900 900 L1 mecha-
nical locking Safety
Calibres 800 & 1000 A 800* 825* 825* 875* 875* 850* 900* 900* 825* 875* 875* 875* perimeter(2)
Calibre possibility V L2
with-
∆ for LEN version, please advise the position of the contactor on the bar.
* magnetic circuit n° 18. out with M N
(1) form to bespecified. Please advise when you order whether the contactor has to be 400 62 107 102 45 45
(2) with metallicwalls.
Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p. 144.
equipped with the «shaft end» - necessary to adapt a possible 500/630 65 110 120 75 60
800/1000 89 118 138 185 85
Without information, the contactor will be delivered without it.
Calibre H1 H2 P
400 75.5 112.5 258
500/630 75.5 112.5 258
800/1000 70.5 186.5 295
20. CBFC 75 400 to 1000 4.0
PG PC SE PC TP R M Disp ACC D
M M + M M Calibres 400/500/630 Calibres 800/1000
25
C 15
12 2
22.5 H2
30 25
B 77,5 25
105,5
16 25
10 N
V AV 125
125 125
CM Ø 12 125
10
32 50
H1 65,5 Ø8
60,5
67.5 30 141 10
AP 28 10
L1 L2 L2 L2 S P
12,5 12,5
CB75 400 to 1000 A

Ue : 1000 VÜ

Modular 1000 V DC contactors, 4 pole, double isulation,
PF AP PF
A C = 6 for 400, B= 13 for 400,
LEN version: z = A + 135 mm or more on request ∆ 8 for 500 / 630. 12 for 500 / 630.

A dimension (mm)
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact AV: mechanical locking axis, attachment centre-to-
centre distance between two superimposed contac-
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 tors:
Number of poles 2 poles to beconnected in series on the positive polarity and 2 poles to beconnected in series on the negative polarity - 400 mm with below contactor of calibre 400, 500,
Calibre 400 A 600 650 650 700 700 675 725 725 775 775 650 700 700 750 750 725 775 775 825 825 and 630 A.
- 575 mm with below contactor of calibre 800 or
Calibres 500 & 630 A 675 700 725* 775* 775* 750* 800* 800* 850* 850* 700 750 775* 825 825 800 850 850 900 900 1000 A.
52
Calibres 800 & 1000 A 775* 825* 800* 850* CM: magnetic circuit can be mounted on the left side
of the contactor. Without any information, it will
always be mounted on the right.
A dimension (mm) locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) D: D type auxiliary contact blocks.
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact Disp + M: device used for DC or rectified AC control
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 circuit. Standard contents: one support with terminal
box, economy resistor(s), rectifier for alternating cur-
Number of poles 2 poles to beconnected in series on the positive polarity and 2 poles to beconnected in series on the negative polarity rent and one M type auxiliary contact block.
Calibre 400 A 675 725 725 775 775 750 800 800 850 850 725 775 775 825 825 800 850 850 900 900 M: M type auxiliary contact blocks(1).
Calibres 500 & 630 A 750 800* 800* 850* 850* 825* 875* 875* 800 850* 850* 900* 900* 875* PC: closing pole.
PF: attachement plane, LERversion.
Calibres 800 & 1000 A 850* 900* 875* PG: left bearing.
A dimension (mm) locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) R: possible auxiliary relays.
Contactor with «mechanical latching with double electrical and manual release» the contactor at rest (lock not supplied).
SE: separator.
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) TP: delayed auxiliary contact block.
A dimension (mm)
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact V: possible mechanical locking facility with a 80, 150,
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 200 and 1250 to 5000 A contactor or with CBA-
CBFC 55 400 to 1000 A old generation contactors.
Number of poles 2 poles to beconnected in series on the positive polarity and 2 poles to beconnected in series on the negative polarity
Calibre 400 A 750 800 800 850 850 825 875 875 925 925 800 850 850 800 900 875 925 925 L1 mecha- Safety
Calibres 500 & 630 A 825 875* 875* 900* 875* 925* 925* nical locking perimeter(2)
Calibre possibility V L2
Calibres 800 & 1000 A 925* with-
M N
∆ for LEN version, please advise the position of the contactor on the bar. out with
* magnetic circuit n° 18. 400 62 67 102 45 45
(1) form to bespecified. Please advise when you order whether the contactor has to be
(2) with metallicwalls. 500/630 65 110 120 75 60
equipped with the «shaft end» - necessary to adapt a possible
800/1000 89 118 138 185 85
Calibre H1 H2 P
400 75.5 112.5 258
500/630 75.5 112.5 258
800/1000 70.5 186.5 295
21. CBFC 75 400 to 1000 2.1
M
Calibres 400/500/630 Calibres 800/1000
15 25
H2 C
PG PR PC TP R M Disp ACC D 12 2
M M + M
N
13 5
25
B 77,5 25
105,5
22.5 125 25
30 16
10 125
H1 PC Ø 12 125
V AV P
125
CM
10 15 Ø 12 32 50
65,5 Ø8 60,5
112 10
77
10
CB75 400 to 1000 A

28
double isulation. Ue: 1000 Ü

AP
Modular DC contactors, 2 main poles and 1 opening pole,

30 12,5 12,5
141
PF AP PF
L1 L2 L3 S C = 6 for 400, B= 13 for 400,
125 PR
67.5 8 for 500 / 630. 12 for 500 / 630.
A
95 80
PF
49 Ø 12 ACC: mechanical latching with single or double release.
AP: pole axis.
Contactor without «mechanical latching with electrical and manual release» AV: mechanical locking axis, attachment centre-to-centre
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) distance between two superimposed contactors:
A dimension (mm) - 400 mm with below contactor of calibre 400, 500, and
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact 630 A.
53
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 - 575 mm with below contactor of calibre 800 or 1000 A.
Number of poles 2 closing poles to beconnected in seriesand one opening pole 400 A without mechanical overlapping CM: magnetic circuit can be mounted on the left side of
the contactor. Without any information, it will always be
Calibre 400 A 525 550 550 600 600 575 625 625 675 675 550 600 600 650 650 625 675 675 725 725 mounted on the right.
Calibre 500 & 630 A 550 600 600 650 650 625 675 700* 750* 750* 575 625 625 675 675 650 700 725* 775* 775* D: D type auxiliary contact blocks.
Calibre 800 & 1000 A 625* 675* 675* 725* 725* 700* 750* 750* 800* 800* 650* 700* 700* 750* 750* 725* 775* 775* 825* 825* Disp + M: device used for DC or rectified AC control cir-
cuit. Standard contents: one support with terminal box,
economy resistor(s), rectifier for alternating current and
Contactor with «mechanical latching with single electrical and manual release» one M type auxiliary contact block.
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) M: M type auxiliary contact blocks(1).
A dimension (mm) PC: closing pole.
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 PG: left bearing.
Number of poles 2 closing poles to beconnected in seriesand one opening pole 400 A without mechanical overlapping R: possible auxiliary relays.
Calibre 400 A 600 650 650 700 700 675 725 725 775 775 625 675 675 725 725 700 750 750 800 800 S: metallic support for «Ronis type» lock for locking the
contactor at rest (lock not supplied).
Calibre 500 & 630 A 625 675 675 725 725 700 750 750* 800* 800* 650 700 700 750 750 725 775 800* 850* 850* SE: separator.
Calibre 800 & 1000 A 700* 750* 750* 800* 800* 775* 825* 825* 875* 875* 725* 775* 775* 825* 825* 800* 850* 850* 900* 900* TP: delayed auxiliary contact block.
V: possible mechanical locking facility with a 80, 150, 200
Contactor with «mechanical latching with double electrical and manual release» and 1250 to 5000 A contactor or with CBA-CBFC 55 400
to 1000 A old generation contactors.
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) L1 mechani-
A dimension (mm) Safety
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact cal locking
possibility V perimeter(2)
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Calibre L2 L3
Number of poles 2 closing poles to beconnected in seriesand one opening pole 400 A without mechanical overlapping with with M N
Calibre 400 A 675 725 725 775 775 750 800 800 850 850 700 750 750 800 800 775 825 825 875 875 - out
Calibre 500 & 630 A 700 750 750 800 800 775 825 825* 875* 875* 725 775 775 825 825 800 850 875* 925* 925* 400 77.5 107.5 105 102 45 45
Calibre 800 & 1000 A 775* 825* 825* 875* 875* 850* 900* 900* 800* 850* 850* 900* 900* 875* 925* 925* 500/630 77.5 107.5 112.5 120 75 60
800/1000 77.5 107.5 135 138 185 85
∆ for LEN version, please advise the position of the contactor on the bar. Please advise when you order whether the contactor has to be
* magnetic circuit n° 18. equipped with the «shaft end» - necessary to adapt a possible Calibre H1 H2 P
(1) form to bespecified. mechanical locking device. 400 75.5 112.5 258
(2) with metallicwalls.
Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p. 144. Without information, the contactor will be delivered without it. 500/630 75.5 112.5 258
800/1000 70.5 186.5 295
22. CBFC 75 400 à 1000 3.1
M PC connecting sections
Calibres 400/500/630 Calibres 800/1000
PG PR PC SE PC TP R M Disp ACC D
M M + M 15 25
H2 C
12 2
13 5
N 25
22.5 B 77,5 25
30 105,5
125 16 25
10
125
V AV H2 PC 125
125 Ø 12
CM
10 P
15 Ø 12
32 50
65,5 Ø8
112 60,5
30 77 10
141 10
AP 28
CB75 400 to 1000 A

double insulation. Ue: 1000 VÜ
Modular DC contactors, 3 main poles and 1 opening pole,
L1 L2 L3 L3 S 12,5 12,5
AP PF
67.5 PF
125 PR
A C = 6 for 400, B= 13 for 400,
LEN version: z = A + 135 mm or more on request ∆ 8 for 500 / 630. 12 for 500 / 630.
95 80
PF Ø 12
49
ACC: mechanical latching with single or double release.
Contactor without «mechanical latching with electrical and manual release» AP: pole axis.
AV: mechanical locking axis, attachment centre-to-centre
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) distance between two superimposed contactors:
A dimension (mm)
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact - 400 mm with below contactor of calibre 400, 500, and
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 630 A.
54
- 575 mm with below contactor of calibre 800 or 1000 A.

2 closing poles to beconnected in series on the positive polarity CM: magnetic circuit can be mounted on the left side of
Number of poles
1 pole on the negative polarity and 1 opening pole 400 A without mechanical overlapping for connection to earth the contactor. Without any information, it will always be
Calibre 400 A 625 650 650 700 700 675 725 725 775 775 650 700 700 750 750 725 775 775 825 825 mounted on the right.
Calibre 500 & 630 A 700* 750* 750* 800* 800* 750* 800* 800* 850* 850* 725* 775* 775* 825* 825* 800* 850* 850* 900* 900* D: D type auxiliary contact blocks.
Disp + M: device used for DC or rectified AC control cir-
Calibre 800 & 1000 A 750* 800* 800* 850* 850* 825* 875* 875* 925* 925* 800* 850* 850* 900* 900* 850* 900* 900* cuit. Standard contents: one support with terminal box,
economy resistor(s), rectifier for alternating current and
Contactor with «mechanical latching with single electrical and manual release» one M type auxiliary contact block.
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) M: M type auxiliary contact blocks(1).
A dimension (mm) PC: closing pole.
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 PG: left bearing.
2 closing poles to beconnected in series on the positive polarity R: possible auxiliary relays.
Number of poles
1 pole on the negative polarity and 1 opening pole 400 A without mechanical overlapping for connection to earth S: metallic support for «Ronis type» lock for locking the
Calibre 400 A 700 750 750 800 800 775 825 825 875 875 725 775 775 825 825 800 850 850 900 900 contactor at rest (lock not supplied).
Calibre 500 & 630 A SE: separator.
775* 800* 800* 850* 850* 825* 875* 875* 925* 925* 800* 850* 850* 900* 900* 850* 900* 900*
TP: delayed auxiliary contact block.
Calibre 800 & 1000 A 850* 875* 875* 900* 875* 925* 925* V: possible mechanical locking facility with a 80, 150, 200
and 1250 to 5000 A contactor or with CBA-CBFC 55 400
Contactor with «mechanical latching with double electrical and manual release» to 1000 A old generation contactors.
locking possibility on the right extremity (AV) locking possibility on the left extremity (V) L1 mechani-
A dimension (mm) Safety
without delayed contact with delayed contact without delayed contact with delayed contact cal locking perimeter(2)
Number of M type blocks 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Calibre possibility V L2 L3
2 closing poles to beconnected in series on the positive polarity with- with M N
Number of poles out
1 pole on the negative polarity and 1 opening pole 400 A without mechanical overlapping for connection to earth
400 77.5 107.5 105 102 45 45
Calibre 400 A 775 825 825 875 875 850 900 900 800 850 850 900 900 875 925 925
500/630 77.5 107.5 112.5 120 75 60
Calibre 500 & 630 A 850* 875* 875* 900* 875* 925* 925*
800/1000 77.5 107.5 135 138 185 85
Calibre 800 & 1000 A 925*
∆ for LEN version, please advise the position of the contactor on the bar. Please advise when you order whether the contactor has to be
* magnetic circuit n° 18. Calibre H1 H2 P
(1) form to bespecified. equipped with the «shaft end» - necessary to adapt a possible 400 75.5 112.5 258
(2) with metallicwalls. mechanical locking device.
Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p. 144. 500/630 75.5 112.5 258
800/1000 70.5 186.5 295
CB 71 1250 to 2000 A
AC poles
CBA 71 1250,
CBA 71 1600,
CBA 71 2000.
DC poles
CBC71 1250,
CBC71 1600,
CBC71 2000.
CBA 71 2000 4.0
■ 1 to 4 single pin main poles with copper contacts for cal- ■ Silver pad contact pins for calibre 1250 A.
ibre 1250 A (silver pad contact on request) and silver
contacts for calibres 1600 and 2000 A. ■ NO or NC delayed block TP86 type(this one also includes
Arc-blowout coil operates only during opening. 4 free instant contacts, i.e. 3 NO + 1 NF).
■ Closing electromagnet mounted on the right side of the ■ More than 6 M type contact blocks can be mounted on
poles (on request, it can be mounted on the left), solid the contactor by mounting them below the contactor to
iron magnetic circuit with 2 coils. reduce its total dimensions.
- control circuit supplied from an ACsource via a rectifier
and power-saved coils (device mounted and cabled on ■ Device to hold the contactor closed in case of untimely
the contactor). micro-cuts for contactors that are not equipped with a
- control circuit supplied from a DC source with power- mechanical latching.
saved coils (device mounted and cabled on the contac-
tor). ■ Mechanical latching with single or double electrical
release (does not change the total dimensions of the
■ Auxiliary contacts contactor).
- two M type contact blocks with 3 contacts
3 NO + 3 NC, instant contacts or form to be specified ■ Self-protective device for the release coil(s).
when you order.
- number of M type contact blocks can be increased to ■ Metallic support for «Ronis type» lock (lock not sup-
reach 6 blocks. plied).
■ Mechanical locking ■ Horizontal or back-to-back mechanical locking.

- vertical type.
■ Poles of different calibres and supplied with different cur-
rents.
■ Poles without magnetic blowout.
■ Reinforced insulation.
■ Double insulation for specific applications.
55
CB 71 1250 to 2000 A
Technical featuresCBA 71 1250 to 2000 A
ACcontactors
Ue up to 1000 V 50/60 Hz
Alternating current CBA Type 71

1250 1600 2000
Thermal nominal current(1) AC_1 A 1250 1600 2000
Nominal insulating voltage V 1000 1000 1000
Nominal operating voltage 40 to 60 Hz(5) V 660 1000 660 1000 660 1000
voltage V 220 380 500 220 380 500 220 380 500
AC’2 - AC_3 duty cycles kW 370 630 630 470 700 700 600 1000 1000
AC_23 duty cycles kVA 490 840 620 930 800 1330
Maximum operating current
Short-time current t � 40°C
1s kA 41 30 65
5s kA 20 15 30
10 s kA 13.5 10.9 21
15 s kA 11.8 8.7 17.9
30 s kA 7.9 6 12
1 min kA 5.5 4.5 8.5
3 min kA 3.3 3 5
10 min kA 2 2.2 3.2
Thermal nominal current under 400 Hz A 938 1200 1500
Allowable overcurrent / time kAeff/s 25/3 25/1.6 25/7
Current switch-off rating(2) voltage V 220/380/440 1100 220/380/440 1100 220/380/440 1100
cosq, = 0.3 kA eff 25 12 25 12 25 12
Current-switch-on rating cosq, = 0.3 kA eff 23 12 23 12 23 12
CBA poles inductance H 2.94 10-7 2.38 10-7 2.82 10-7
CBA poles resistance cold Ω 5.25 10-5 7.19 10-5 4.01 10-5
hot Ω 5.96 10-5 7.55 10-5 4.72 10-5
Number of openings on load at nominal current 50000 100000 50000
Number of openingson load under for I = 1250 A 50000 150000 150000
380 V before contact for I = 1600 A 35000 100000 100000
replacement: for I = 2000 A 50000 50000
Control circuit
Nominal voltage AC 50 Hz V 24 - 48 - 110 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 500(4)
DC V 24 - 48 - 110 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 500(4)
AC* 1P VA 180/14 180/14 180/14
2P VA 380/24 380/24 380/24
3P VA 860/50 860/50 860/50
4P VA 1700/88 1700/88 1700/88
DC 1P W 165/17.5 165/17.5 165/17.5
2P W 360/35 360/35 360/35
3P W 836/55 836/55 836/55
4P W 1600/110 1600/110 1600/110
Constant L/R rate of electromagnet open/closed ms 118/41 118/41 118/41
Closing time(6) at Un ms 180 180 180
at 0.85 Un ms 215 215 215
Opening time(6) at Un ms
between commandand
- total opening of electromagnet ms 82 82 82
(1) in open air. •Factor to be applied to the contactor for poles connected in parallel, this
(2) arcing time < 15 ms. factor already includes a safety margin:
(3) diodes are warranted up to an overload of 3 Un efficient.
(4) for other voltages, please consult us. 2 poles in parallel 3 poles in parallel
(5) if nominal operation voltage >1000 V, please consult us. AC I.th 1 pole x 2 x 0.7 I.th 1 pole x 3 x 0.66
(6) closing time is measured from the supply of the closing coil until contact
of main poles. Opening time is measured from the supply of the tripping
coil until the separation of main poles. •The current switch-off rating of poles connected in parallel remains the
* control circuit: same as for a single pole.
Equipments commanded with alternating current are rectified(3) and
power-saved.
•Temperature factor to be applied to the poles or the current controlled
according to the ambient temperature (around the contactor):
1.04 40 < t < 45°C

1.08 45 < t � 50°C
1.12 50 < t � 55°C
1.19 55 < t � 60°C
56
CB71 1250 to 2000 A
Technical featuresCBC71 1250 to 2000 A
DCcontactors
Ue: 600 and up to 2000 VÜ
Direct current CBC Type 71

1250 1600 2000
Thermal nominal current(1) DC_1 A 1250 1600 2000
Nominal insulating voltage(7) V 1000 1000 1000
Nominal operating voltage(5) V 600 700(2) 1000(2) 600 700(2) 1000(2) 600 700(2) 1000(2)
permanent duty A 1250 1600 2000
8 hours duty A 1250 1600 2000
10 minutes A 2000 2400 3500
temporary duty without
openings on load 30 minutes A 1400 1700 2500
60 minutes A 1250 1600 2000
10 minutes A 2400 2400 3500
temporary duty with
openings on load 30 minutes A 1700 1700 2500
60 minutes A 1500 1600 2000
1s kA 41 30 65
5s kA 20 15 30
10 s kA 13.5 10.9 21
15 s kA 11.8 8.7 17.9
30 s kA 7.9 6 12
1 min kA 5.5 4.5 8.5
3 min kA 3.3 3 5
10 min kA 2 2.2 3.2
Allowable overcurrent / time kA /s 25/3 25/1.6 25/7
Current switch-off rating voltage V 550 700 1000 550 700 1000 550 700 1000
one-pole kA 23 18 23 18 23 18
bipolar(2) kA 23 19 23 19 23 19
voltage V 1500 2000 1500 2000 1500 2000
tripolar(2) kA 19 8 19 8 19 8
tetrapolar(2) kA 19 19 19
Current switch-on rating L/R= 15 ms kA 25/550 V 25/550 V 25/550 V
Poles inductance H 2.94 10-7 2.38 10-7 2.82 10-7
Poles resistance cold Ω 5.25 10-5 7.19 10-5 4.01 10-5
hot Ω 5.96 10-5 7.55 10-5 4.72 10-5
Number of openings on load at nominal current 50000 100000 50000
for I = 1250 A 50000 150000 150000
Number of openings on load under 35000 100000 100000
440 V b f l for I = 1600 A
for I = 2000 A 50000 50000
Control circuit
Nominal voltage AC 50 Hz V 24 - 48 - 110 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 500(4)
DC V 24 - 48 - 110 - 127 - 220 - 440 - 500(4)
AC* 1P VA 180/14 180/14 180/14
2P VA 380/24 380/24 380/24
3P VA 860/50 860/50 860/50
4P VA 1700/88 1700/88 1700/88
DC 1P W 165/17.5 165/17.5 165/17.5
2P W 360/35 360/35 360/35
3P W 836/55 836/55 836/55
4P W 1600/110 1600/110 1600/110
Constant L/R rate of electromagnet open/closed ms 118/41 118/41 118/41
at 0.85Un ms 215 215 215
Opening time(6) at Un ms
between commandand
- total opening of electromagnet ms 82 82 82
(2) for applications under voltages > 600 Vdc, please consult our technical according to the ambient temperature (around the contactor):
department.
(3) diodes are warranted up to an overload of 3 Un efficient. 1.04 40 < t < 45°C
(4) for other voltages, please consult us. 1.08 45 < t � 50°C
(5) if nominal operating voltage > 1000 V, please consult us.
(6) closing time is measured from the supply of the closing until the contact 1.12 50 < t � 55°C
of main poles. Opening time is measured from the supply of the tripping 1.19 55 < t � 60°C
coil until the separation of main poles.
(7) dielectric testing voltage related to a given insulation voltage can reach •Factor to be applied to the contactor for poles connected in parallel, this
8 kV for specific applications. factor already includes a safety margin:
* control circuit:
Equipments commanded with alternating current are rectified(3) and 2 poles in parallel 3 poles in parallel
power-saved. DC I.th 1 pole x 2 x 0.8 I.th 1 pole x 3 x 0.75
same as for a single pole. For technical features of opening poles, see p. 70.
57
CB 71 1250 to 2000 A
Overall dimensionsCBA & CBC71 1250 to 2000 A
AC & DCcontactors
ÜÜÜ- CBA : Ue up to 1000 V 50/60 Hz
CBC: Ue up to 600 VÜ
23. CBA - CBC 71 - 1250 to 2000 x.0(4)
AME
AP
VF 256
200
10
PF PF VP
16 = =
N
14
16
200 42
10
V = =
171
25
(1)
18 87 74 120 86 342
(2) PF
121 110 110 S
18 AF
E A1
1) E attachment centre-to-centre distance 2) Protrusion A1 AF:

attachment axis.
AME: mechanical latching with single electrical release (option:
Number Locking possibility Number of TR Number of M double electrical release).
of poles without with delayed blocks blocks(3) AP: pole axis.
1 419 mm 459 mm 0 2 10 mm PF: attachment plane.
2 529 mm 569 mm 0 3 48 mm S: metallic support for “Ronis type” lock for locking the contac-
3 639 mm 679 mm 0 4 60 mm V: possible mechanical locking, attachment centre-to-centre dis-
4 749 mm 789 mm 0 5 100 mm tance between two superimposed contactors: 625 mm
0 6 100 mm VF: attachment screws.
1 1 21 mm VP: see connecting sections.
1 2 48 mm
(1) with mechanical locking.
1 3 70 mm (2) dimension without locking device.
1 4 110 mm (3) block with 2 or 3 contacts.
1 5 110 mm (4) x is the number of closing poles.
3) Insulation distance (safety perimeter)

DC AC
� 220V < 220 V
Currents toswitch-off Currents toswitch-off
� 220V > 220 V
� 15 kA � 25 kA � 15 kA � 25 kA
1P 2P 1P 2P 1P 2P 1P 2P
M=N M=N M=N M=N M=N M=N M=N M=N M N M N
Metallic walls 250 400 400 150 150 180 200
Insulated walls 120 200 120 250 120 250 120 80 80 90 100
Connecting sections
■ CBA - CBC1250 ■ CBA - CBC1600/2000
Ø 13 12,5
25
25
50 25
80
12,5 25
12,5 25 15
50
58
CB71 1250 to 2000 A
Overall dimensionsCBC71 1250 to 2000 A
ÜÜÜ
DCcontactorsCBCUe: 1000 VÜ
Double insulation
CBC 71 - 1250 to 2000 2.0 CBC 71 - 1250 to 2000 3.0
PC SE PC PC SE PC
AME AME 256

256
PF VF PF VF
PF PF
33 33 18
18
18 10 18 10
200 200
V V
33 33
40 101,5
(1)
120 40 101,5(1) 120
80 (2) S 80 (2)
101,5 165 101,5 165 165 S
A A2 A A2
Z Z
CBC 71 - 1250 to 2000 2.1 CBC 71 - 1250 to 2000 3.1
PC PC SE PC
AME AME 256

256
PR PF
PF VF VF
PR PF
PF
33 33 18
18
10 10
18 18
200 200
V V
33 33 (1)
40 115(1) 120
40 115 120
80 (2) 141,5 80 (2) 141,5
115 165 S 115 165 165 S
A A2 A A2
Z Z
CBC 71 - 1250 to 2000 4.0
SE AME: mechanical latching with single electrical release (option: double electrical release).
PC PC
PC: closing pole.
PR: rupturing pole 500 A, for calibre 800 and 1000, please consult us.
AME 256 S: metallic support for “Ronis type” lock for locking the contactor at rest (lock not supplied).
SE: separator.
PF VF V: possible mechanical locking, attachment centre-to-centre distance between two superimposed
PF contactors: 625 mm.
33 VF: attachment screws.
18
Z: total length of attachment barsZ = A + A2 + 80 mm. On request, lenght can be increased, in
that case, please advise the position of the contactor on the bars.
10
18
(1) with possibility of mechanical latching.
200
V (2) without possibility of mechanical latching.
33 (1)
40 101,5 120
80 101,5
(2)
165 165 165 S
A A2
Z
59
CB71 1250 to 2000 A
Overall dimensionsCBC71 1250 to 2000 A
DCcontactorsUe: 1000 VÜÜÜÜ
Double insulation
PC pole PR pole
PF
Ø 12
15
M
AP
112
77
200
VP 10
= =
200
200 42
10
= =
171
25 54 69
84 244
PF Ø 12 62,5
PF
AF
AF: attachment axis. Number of TR

AP: pole axis. Number of M blocks(3) A2
delayed blocks
PC: closing pole. 0 2 85
PR: rupturing pole 500 A, for calibre 800 and 1000, please consult us. 0 3 128
VP: see connecting sections. 0 4 140
0 5 180
0 6 180
Safety perimeter 1 1 101
1 2 128
M N
1 3 150
Metallic walls 180 200
1 4 190
Insulated walls 120 120
1 5 190
(3) block with 2 or 3 contacts.
Connecting sections
A
■ CBC 1250 ■ CBC 1600/2000 Type of contactor
Locking possibility
without with
Ø 13 12,5
25 CBC71 - 1250/1600/2000 2.0 545 585
CBC71 - 1250/1600/2000 3.0 710 750
CBC71 - 1250/1600/2000 4.0 875 915
25 CBC71 - 1250/1600/2000 2.1 700 740
50 25
80 CBC71 - 1250/1600/2000 3.1 865 905
12,5 25
12,5 25 15
CBC 71 1250 to 2000 x.x
50
x.x: 1st figure represents the number of closing poles and 2nd figure the
number of opening poles.
Nota: All these contactors have a double insulation, dielectric testing voltage:
2.0: two-pole break.
80 kV, 50 Hz for 1 min (for other ratings, consult us).
3.0: two-pole break in series on the positive polarity and single-pole break on
the negative polarity.
4.0: two-pole break in series on the positive and negative polarities.
2.1: two-pole break and rupturing pole 500 A without overlapping between the
poles.
3.1: two-pole break in series on the positive polarity, single-pole break on nega-
tive polarity and rupturing pole 500 A without overlapping between poles.
Poles to be connected in series by the customer.
Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p 144.
60
CBC98 2560 to 5000 A and more
CB 2500 to 5000 A and more
AC Poles
CBA 54 2500,
CBA 60 4000.
DC Poles
CBC54 3000,
CBC60 5000,
CBC60 5500,
CBC60 6200,
CBC60 8000.
CBC 60 5000 2.0
■ 1 to 4 single pin main poles (2 pins for calibres 4000 and ■ Silver pad contact pins.
5000) with copper contact (silver pad contact on request
or for specific applications). ■ NO or NC delayed block TP 86 type (this one also
Arc-blowout coil operates only during opening. includes 4 free instant contacts, i.e. 3 NO + 1 NC).
■ Closing electromagnet mounted on the right side of the ■ More than 6 M type contact blocks can be mounted on
poles (on request, it can be mounted on the left), solid the contactor by mounting them below the contactor to
iron magnetic circuit with 2 coils. reduce its total dimensions.
- control circuit supplied from an AC source via a recti-
fier and power-saved coils (device mounted and cabled ■ Device to hold the contactor closed in case of untimely
on the contactor). micro-cuts for contactors that are not equipped with a
- control circuit supplied from a DC source with power- mechanical latching.
saved coils (device mounted and cabled on the contac-
tor). ■ Mechanical latching with single or double electrical
release (does not change the total dimensions of the
Auxiliary contacts contactor).
■ Two type M contact blocks with 3 contacts 3 NO + 3 NC, ■ Self-protective device for the release coil(s).
instant contacts or form to be specified when you order.
■ Metallic support for «Ronis type» lock (lock not sup-
■ Number of M type contact blocks can be increased to plied).
reach 6 blocks.
■ Horizontal or back-to-back mechanical locking.
Mechanical locking
■ Poles of different calibres and supplied with different cur-
- vertical type. rents.
■ Poles without magnetic blowout.
■ Reinforced insulation.
■ Double insulation for specific applications.
61
Technical featuresCBA - CBC2500 to 6200 A
CBA: AC contactors
CBC: DC contactors
CBA CBC
2500 4000 3000 5000 5500 (2) 6200 (2)
Thermal nominal current(1) AC_1 - DC_1 A 2500 4000 3000 5000 5500 6200
connecting section mm2 2000 5000 2000 5000 6000 7000
AC 40 to 60 Hz V 660 660
DC V 600/1000(1) 600/1000(1) 600/1000(1) 600/1000(1)
AC voltage V 220 380 500/660 220 380 500/660
AC’2 - AC_3 duty cycles kW 750 1250 1250 1150 2000 2000
AC_23 duty cycles kVA 1600 1875 2600 3000
DC voltage V
DC_2 - DC_4 duty cycles kW
permanent service A 2500 4000 3000 5000 5500(2) 6200(2)
short-time service with t :,; 40°C
1s kA 30 45 36 56 61 69
5s kA 14 20.5 16 25 27 31
10 s kA 9.7 16.2 11.5 20 22 24.5
15 s kA 8 12 9.5 15 16.5 18.5
30 s kA 5.95 9 7 11 12 13.5
1 min kA 4.5 7 5.4 8.5 9 10.5
3 min kA 3.3 5.2 4 6.5 7 8
10 min kA 2.8 4.5 3.3 5.6 6 6.9
Allowable overcurrent / time
AC kA eff/s 30/1 45/1
DC kA/s 36/1 56/1 61/1 69/1
Current swith-off rating
AC voltage V 220 380 500 220 380 500
cos cp = 0.3 kA eff 93 50 37 93 50 37
DC voltage V 250 500 1000(1) 250 500 1000(1) 250 500 1000(1) 250 500 1000(1)
L/R= 15 ms kA 55 35 35 55 35 35 55 35 35 55 35 35
AC cos cp = 0.3 kA eff 132 70 55 132 70 55
DCL/R = 15 ms kA 55 35 35 55 35 35 55 35 35 55 35 35
CBA poles inductance H 4.48 10-7 2.24 10-7
Poles resitance cold Ω 1.68 10-5 0.838 10-5
hot Ω
Number of openings under load at 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000
nominal current
Mechanical endurance millions of operations 1 1 1 1 1 1
Control circuit
Nominal voltage AC 50 Hz V 110 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 500
DC V 110 - 220 - 400 - 500
AC* 1P VA 760/75 750/75 760/75 750/75 750/75 750/75
2P VA 760/75 1950/127 760/75 1950/127 1950/127 1950/127
3P VA 1440/127 5250/220 1440/127 5250/220 5250/220 5250/220
4P VA 1950/127 1950/127
DC 1P W 610/35 610/46 610/35 610/46 610/46 610/46
2P W 610/35 960/72 610/35 960/72 960/72 960/72
3P W 1000/66 2600/145 1000/66 2600/145 2600/145 2600/145
4P W 1100/72 1100/72
ConstantL/Rrate of electromagnet open/closed ms
Closing time at Un ms 350 350 350 350 350 350
at 0.85 Un ms
between commandand
- separation of contacts ms 60 60 60 60 60 60
- total opening of electromagnet ms 85 85 85 85 85 85
- complete opening ms 300 300 300 300 300 300
CBA CBC
(1) in open air •Factor to be applied to the contactor in case of poles connected in parallel
(2) CBC 5000 A, direct current: (this factor already includes a safety margin).
to reach 5500 A: usual connecting section + 20 %,
to reach 6200 A: usual connecting section + 40 %. 2 poles in parallel 3 poles in parallel
(3) diodes are warranted up to an overload of 3 Un efficient. AC I.th x 0.7 I.th x 0.66
* control circuit: DC I.th x 0.8 I.th x 0.75
Equipments controlled with alternating current are rectified and power-
saved. •The current switch-off rating of poles connected in parallel remains the
(4) for two-pole break, please consult us. same as the one for a single pole.
62
Technical featuresCBA - CBC98 2560 to 5000 A
CBC: DC contactor
CBA : AC contactor (consult us)
DC current
2560 3200 5000 (8)
Generation 98 98 98
Thermal nominal current(1) A 2560 3200 5000
Nominal insulating voltage(7) V 1000 1000 1000
Nominal operating voltage(5) V 600 700(2) 1000(2) 600 700(2) 1000(2) 600 700(2) 1000(2)
Short-time current
1s kA 43
5s kA 21,6 43 50
10 s kA 15,7 30 40
15 s kA 12,5 25,7 36
30 s kA 8,6 17,3 24
1 min kA 6,5 12,2 17
3 min kA 4,3 7,2 10
10 min kA 3,1 4,6 6,5
Current switch-off rating voltage V 1000 1000 1000
L/R = 5 ms single pole kA 10 10 10
Current switch-off rating voltage V 550 700 1000 1500 550 700 1000 1500 550 700 1000 1500
L/R = 15 ms single pole kA 23 18 23 18 23 18
two pole(2) kA 32 23 19 6,6 32 23 19 6,6 32 23 19 6,6
voltage V 1000 1500 1800 2000 1000 1500 1800 2000 1000 1500 1800 2000
three pole(2) kA 23 19 14 8 23 19 14 8 23 19 14 8
voltage V 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
Four pole(2) kA 30 19 5 30 19 5 30 19 5
Current switch-on rating L/R= 15 ms kA 30/550 V 30/550 V 30/550 V
Control circuit
Nominal voltages AC 50 Hz V 24 - 48 - 110 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 500(4)
DC V 24 - 48 - 110 - 127 - 220 - 440 - 500(4)
Maximum consumptions s inrush/hold
AC* 1P VA 380/24 380/24 380/24
1P1500 V(8) VA 860/50 860/50 860/50
2P VA 1700/88 1700/88 1700/88
2P3000 V(9) VA 3000/180 3000/180 3000/180
DC 1P W 360/35 360/35 360/35
1P1500 V(8) W 836/55 836/55 836/55
2P W 1600/110 1600/110 1600/110
2P3000 V(9) W 2900/250 2900/250 2900/250
Constant L/Rof electromagnet open/close ms 118/41 118/41 118/41
at 0,85Un ms 215 215 215
Opening time at on(6) at Un ms
between commandand
- separation of contact ms 90 90 90
- complete opening ms < 300 < 300 < 300
(1) in open air.
(2) for applications under voltages > 600 Vdc, please consult our technical
departement.
(3) diodes are warranted up to an overload of 3 Un efficient.
(4) for other voltages , please consult us.
(5) if nominal operating voltage > 1000 V, please consult us.
(6) closing time is measured from the supply of closing until the contact
of main poles. Opening time is measured from the supply of the tripping
coil until the separation of main poles.
(7) dielectric testing voltage related to a given insulation voltage can reach
8 KV for specific applications.
* control circuit :
Equipements commanded with alternating currrent are rectified(3) and
power-saved.
same as for a single pole.
•Temperature factor to be applied to the poles or the current controlled

according to the ambient temperature (around the contactor):
1,04 40 < t < 45°C

1,08 45 < t � 50°C
1,12 50 < t � 55°C
1,19 55 < t � 60°C
•Factor to be applied to the contactor for poles connected in parallel, this

factor already includes a safety margin:

DC I.th 1 pole x 2 x 0,8 I.th 1 pole x 3 x 0,75
(8) calibre 5500 A : lower section C = 15 mm.

(9) 2 x 2 blowout poles with separator.
CBC 98 3200 2.1, 1000 VÜ
63
Overall dimensionsCBA - CBC2500 to 6200 A
CBA : Ue 660 V 50/60 Hz
CBC: Ue 600 VÜ
24.CBA CBC 2500 - 5000
M
PF PF
AME B2 B5 40
B1
B6
B2
50
25 25
50 N
B 475
V 25 Ø13
(3)
B4 50
B3
M
B6
(1)
18 A2 A3 120 C1 C
S
(2) A5 A5 PF
A4 18 A1
E
(1) with locking possibility. AME: possible mechanical latching (with single or double release).
(2) dimension without locking possibility. M: M type auxiliary contact block, form to bespecified.
(3) connecting section can face the bottom, to be specified in that case when you order. PF: attachment plane.
S: metallicsupport for “Ronis type lock” for locking thecontactor at rest (lock not supplied).
V: possible mechanical locking, attachment center-to-center distance between two superimposed
contactors: 700 mm.
Calibre A2 A3 A4 A5 B B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 C C1
2500/3000 97 100 154 180 613 14.5 16 118 275 110.5 27.5 408 146
4000/5000(1) 112 143 212 228 622 16 20 127 277 115 32 427 130
1) Attachment centre-to-centre distance E 2) Protrusion A1

Number of poles 2500/3000 4000/5000(1) Position of contacts compared
locking possibility locking possibility with moving shaft 2500/3000 4000/5000(1)
with without with without above below
1 536 579 628 671 1 M block 1 M block 5 0
2 716 759 856 899 2 M blocks 2 M blocks 69 41
3 896 939 1084 1127 1 delayed block 1 or 2 M blocks 69 41
4 1116 1139 consult us
3) Insulating distance (safety perimeter)

2500/3000 4000/5000(1)
ACand DC current ACcurrent DC current
< 300 V 300 to 600 V � 600 V < 300 V 300 to 600 V
M N M N M N M N M N
Metallic walls 200 100 400 300 160 160 400 400 do not use
Insulated walls 100 65 200 150 120 120 250 250 250 250
Connecting sections
2500/3000 4000/5000(1)
5,1 5,1 5,1 5,1
5,1 5,1
5 5
5 5 5
65,6 5 5
5 92,2
5,1 5,1 5,1 5,1
AP 5,1 5,1
AP
5 5
5 5 5
5 5
AP: pole axis. 5
(1) CBC 5000 A, direct current:
to reach 5500 A: usual connecting section + 20 %,
to reach 6200 A: usual connecting section + 40 %.
6200 A : usual connecting section + 40 %. Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p. 144.
64
Overall dimensionsCBA - CBC4000 to 8000 A
CBA : Ue up to 660 V 50/60 Hz
CBC: Ue up to 1000 VÜ
25. CBA - CBC 4000 to 8000
PC AME PC
PF PF
A6
16
475
V
A6 43 120
A2 S
A3 A4 A4 A5 A1
Z
AME: possible mechanical latching (with single or double release). PF: attachment plane.
AP: pole axis. S: metallic support for «Ronis type lock» for locking the contactor at rest (lock not supplied).
M: M type auxiliary contact block. V: possible mechanical coupling, attachment centre-to-centre distance between two superimposed
PC: closing pole. contactors: 700 mm.
Z: total length of the attachment bars: Z = A + A1 + A2
Connecting sections
M
5,1 5,1
5,1 5,1
115 44
37
25 50
25 5 5
5 5
5 92,2
50 N 5,1
5,1
622 475 5, 1 5,1
25 AP
Ø13
277 50
5 5
127 5 5
5
37 PC
130 427
PF
Type and calibre Nominal Type A3 locking possibility

voltage of A A2 A4 A5 A6
of contactor of insulation without with
poles
CBA 60 4000 4.0 660 Vac normal 1339 + A3 90 140 183 228 140 18
CBC60 8000 2.0 600 Vcc normal 1339 + A3 90 140 183 228 140 18
CBC60 8800 2.0 600 Vcc normal 1339 + A3 90 140 183 228 140 18
CBC60 9920 2.0 600 Vcc normal 1339 + A3 90 140 183 228 140 18
CBC60 5000 2.0 1200 Vcc double 1580 + A3 105 175 218 270 175 33
CBC60 5500 2.0 1200 Vcc double 1580 + A3 105 175 218 270 175 33
CBC60 6200 2.0 1200 Vcc double 1580 + A3 105 175 218 270 175 33
Insulating distance (safety perimeter) Protrusion A1(1)

AC current DC current Below position Type of insulation
600 V 300 V 300 to 600 V 600 to 1200 V Above position Caution: in that case, block
functions are reversed normal double
M N M N M N M N 1 M type block 1 M type block 120 135
Metallic walls 160 160 400 400 450 450 500 500
2 M type blocks 2 M type blocks 155 170
Insulated walls 120 120 250 250 250 250 350 350
3 M type blocks 3 M type blocks 220 235
(1) dimensions can be reduced by mounting the auxiliary contact below the contactor (consult us).
65
Overall dimensionsCBC54 3000 A
DC contactor Ue: 1000 VÜ
26. CBC 54 3000

CBC 54 3000 2.0 CBC 54 3000 2.1
PR PC
PF AME PF
14,5
PF AME PF
14,5
475
V
(4)
475
V (4)
33 A2 (1) 33
A3 120
90 2) S
A4 A5 33
A1(3) 33 A2 (1)
A A6 120
S
Z 90
A8(2) A7 A5
A A1(3)
Z
CBC 54 3000 3.0
PC SE PC PR PC SE PC
PF AME PF PF AME PF
14,5 14,5
475 475
V (4) V (4)
33 33
33 A2 (1) 33 A2 (1 )
A3 120 A3 120
S S
90 90 (2)
A4(2) A5 A5 (3) A4 A5 A5 A5 (3)
A1 A1
A A
Z Z
CBC 54 3000 4.0 CBC 54 3000 3.1

PC SE PC
AME: possible mechanical latching (with single or double release).
PC: closing pole.
PF AME PF PR: opening pole 800 or 1000 A, for poles 400, 500 and 630 A, consult us.
14,5 S: metallic support for “Ronis type” lock for locking the contactor at rest (lock not supplied).
SE: separator.
Z: total length of the attachment bars: Z = A + A1 + 90 mm.
V: possible mechanical coupling, attachment centre-to-centre distance between two superim-
posed contactors: 700 mm.
(1) with locking possibility.

(2) dimension without locking possibility.
475 (3) dimensions can be reduced by mounting the auxiliary contacts below the contactor (consult us).
V (4) connecting sections can face the bottom, in that case, specify it when you order.
(4) .
33
33 A2 A3
(1)
120
S
90 (2)
A4 A5 A5 A5 (3)
A A1
Z Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p. 144.
66
DC contactor Ue: 1000 VÜ
PC pole PR pole
SE M
180 M Ø8 25
27,5 110,5 40
205 25
80
50 25
25 25
475
50 N
120
613
475
25 Ø13
50
275
146
118
18
126 M Ø12
27,5 146 408 337
PF PF
Connecting sections A
5,1 5,1 Type of contactor Locking possibility
without with
CBC54 3000 2.0 782 825
CBC54 3000 3.0 1052 1095
CBC54 3000 4.0 1322 1365
5 5 CBC54 3000 2.1 1020 1063
5
65,6 CBC54 3000 3.1 1290 1333
5,1 5,1
AP
Insulating distance (safety perimeter)
M N
5 5 Metallic walls 400 400
5 Insulated walls 350 350
AP: pole axis.

PC: closing pole. Nota:
PR: opening pole 800 or 1000 A, for poles 400, 500 and 630 A, consult us. CBC 54 3000 2.0: two-pole break.
SE: separator.
CBC 54 3000 3.0: two-pole break in series on the positive polarity and single-pole
Calibre A2 A3 A4(1) A5 A6 A7 A8(1) break on the negative polarity.
3000 40 145 142 270 143 240 140 CBC 54 3000 4.0: two-pole break in series on the negative and positive polarity.
(1) dimension without locking possibility. CBC 54 3000 2.1: two-pole break and rupturing pole 800 or 1000 A without
overlapping with the poles.
Protrusion A1 CBC 54 3000 3.1: two-pole break in series on the positive polarity, single-pole
break on the negative polarity and rupturing pole 800 or 1000 A without overlap-
Below position ping with the poles.
Above position Caution: in that case, block A1
functions are reversed
1 M type block 1 M type block 109 All these contactors have a double insulation, dielectric testing voltage: 80 kV,
2 M type blocks 2 M type blocks 159 50 Hz for 1 min.
Poles to be connected in series by the customer.
67
Ue : 1000 VÜ
27. CBC 60 5000

CBC 60 5000 2.0
PC AME
PF PF
14,5
475
V
33
A2 (1)
33 A3 A5 120
S
105 (2)
A4 (3)
A A1
Z
CBC 60 5000 3.0

PC SE PC AME
PF PF
14,5
475
V
33 33
A2 (1) A5 A5 120
A3 S
105 (2)
A4
(3)
A A1
Z
CBC 60 5000 2.1

PR PC AME
PF PF
14,5
475
V
33 33
A2 A7 A5 120
A6 S
105 A8
(3)
A A1
Z
Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p. 144. .
68
Ue : 1000 VÜ
PC pole PR pole
SE M
180 M Ø8 25
27,5 110,5 40
205 25
80
50 25
25 25
475
50 N
120
613
475
25 Ø13
50
275
146
118
18
126 M Ø12
27,5 146 408 337
PF PF
Connecting sections
A
5,1 5,1 Type of contactor Locking possibility
5,1 5,1
without with
CBC54 5000 2.0 850 893
CBC54 5000 3.0 1130 1173
CBC54 5000 4.0 1095 1138
5 5
5 5
5 92,2
5 ,1 5,1
5,1 5,1 Insulating distance (safety perimeter)
AP
M N
Metallic walls 500 500
Insulated walls 350 350
5 5
5 5
5
Nota:
AME: possible mechanical latching (with single or double release). CBC 60 5000 2.0: two-pole break.
AP: pole axis. CBC 60 5000 3.0: two-pole break in series on the positive polarity and single-pole
PC: closing pole 5000 A. break on the negative polarity.
PF: attachment plane. CBC 60 5000 2.1: two-pole break and rupturing pole 800 or 1000 A without
PR: opening pole 800 or 1000 A, for pole 500 A, consult us.
S: metallic support for “Ronis type” lock for locking the contactor at rest (lock not supplied). overlapping with the poles.
SE: separator.
V: possible mechanical coupling, attachment centre-to-centre distance between two superim- All these contactors have a double insulation, dielectric testing voltage: 80 kV,
posed contactors: 700 mm. 50 Hz for 1 min.
Z: total length of the attachment bars: Z = A + A1 + 90 mm.
(1) with locking possibility. Poles to be connected in series by the customer.

(2) dimension without locking possibility.
(3) dimensions can be reduced by mounting the auxiliary contacts below the contactor (consult us)
Calibre A2 A3 A4(2) A5 A6 A7 A8(2)

5000 40 178 175 280 143 280 140
Protrusion A1
Below position
Above position Caution: in that case, block A1
functions are reversed.
1 M type block 1 M type block 135
2 M type blocks 2 M type blocks 170
3 M type blocks 3 M type blocks 235
69
CBC 98 2560 to 5000 A and more
Overall dimensions CBC 98 2560 to 5000 A
CBC : DC contactor
28. CBC 98 2560 and 3200
CBC 98 - 2560 to 3200 1.0 Ts 600 V Ü

PC
M AM
25
10 5 150
256
200
Ø16
44.5
34
155
N (6x)
155
PF PF 50 50
200
25
PC
M
200
AF
CM2D 150
25
14
120
PF 18
145
18
145
5
44.5
Ø16
342 (6x)
2
10 65 74 90 159 116 A1 25 50 50
25
439
CBC 98 - 2560 to 3200 1.0 Ts 1000 V Ü double insulation

SE
PC PC
M AM
10 5 150
44.5 25
256
200
34 Ø16
(6x)
155
155
N
PF PF 50 50
200
475
25
PC
25 25
80
M
50
200
AF
Ø13 CM D 315
171
(6x)
25
200
10
25
120
PF
145
33 33
145
100
13,5
25 44.5
344 84 Ø16
(8x)
436
2 50 50 50
10 80 94 90 165 165 116 A1
32.5
630
Insulation distance Protusion A1

metallic walls insulated walls Number of Number of M(1) Double
voltage delayed blocks type blocks insulation
M N M N
� 220 150 200 120 160 0 2 75 mm 90 mm
> 220 200 240 150 200 0 3 125 mm 140 mm
AF : attachement axis.
0 4 125mm 140 mm
AM : mechanical latching with 0 5 190 mm 205 mm
electrical release. 0 6 190 mm 205 mm
CM2D : magnetic circuit 1 1 86 mm 101 mm
M : auxiliary contact blocks, 1 2 125 mm 140 mm
form to specify. 1 3 125 mm 140 mm
PC : contactor pole.
1 4 190 mm 205 mm
PF :attachment plane.
SE : separator. 1 5 190 mm 205 mm
70
CB 2500 to 5000 A and more
Overall dimensions CBC 98 2560 to 5000 A
CBC : DC contactor
28. CBC 98 2560 and 3200
CBC 98 - 2560 to 3200 1.1 Ts 1000 V Ü

SE
PC PC
M AM
10 5 150
PR
44.5 25
256
200
34 Ø16
(6x)
155
155
N
PF PF 50 50
200
475
25
PC
25 25
80
M
50
200
AF
Ø13 CM2 D 315
171
(6x)
25
200
14
25
120
PF
145
33 33
145
100
25 44.5
344 84 213,5 Ø16
(8x)
436
2 50 50 50
10 80 74 110 90 165 165 116 A1
32.5
720
Rupturing pole 500 A (without overlapping)
15
Ø12
112
77
PR
54
69
Ø12
60.5
Insulation distance Protusion A1

metallic walls insulated walls Number of Number of M(1)
voltage delayed blocks type blocks
M N M N
� 220 150 200 120 160 0 2 90 mm
AF : attachement axis. 0 3 140 mm
AM : mechanical latching with > 220 200 240 150 200
electrical release. 0 4 140mm
CM2D : magnetic circuit 0 5 205 mm
M : auxiliary contact blocks, 0 6 205 mm
form to specify. 1 1 101 mm
PC : contactor pole. 1 2 140 mm
PF :attachment plane. 1 3 140 mm
PR :rupturing pole 500 A
without overlapping
1 4 205 mm
SE : separator. 1 5 205 mm
. 71
28.
CBC 98 - 2560 to 3200 2.0 Ts 600 and 1000 V Ü

SE
C
PC PC
AM
B
M
10 5 5
C
9
256
200
34
155
N
PF PF
8
475
PC
25
60
Over
M
all CBC
CBC : DC contactor
200
AF
CM2D
98
2560
dim
25
G
ensi
120
PF F F
145
5 5
ons t
H
436
2
E D 90 C 90 J 116 A1 o
72
10
A 5000
A
150 Dimensions (mm)
and
A C D E F G H J more
44.5 25
Standard 615 110 74 65 18 14 342 135
f 16
(6x) Doubleinsulation 730 165 94 80 33 10 344 175 CBC
155
25 50 50 with separator
200
Insulation distance (safety perimeter

98
voltage
� 220 150
M
200
N
120
M
160
N 256
> 220 200 240 150 200 0
150
Protusion A1
Number of
delayed blocks
Number of M(1)
type blocks
Double
insulation to
0 2 75 mm 90 mm
0 3 125 mm 140 mm 5
200
0 4 125mm 140 mm
0
145
AM : mechanical latching with 0 5 190 mm 205 mm

25 44.5
f 16
electrical release. (6x) 0 6 190 mm 205 mm
M : auxiliary contact blocks, 25 50 50 1 2 125 mm 140 mm
form to specify.
1 3 125 mm 140 mm
PF :attachment plane. 1 4 190 mm 205 mm
28.
CBC 98 - 2560 to 3200 2.1 Ts 600 and 1000 V Ü

SE
C
PC PC
AM
B
M
10
PR
5 5
C
9
256
200
34
155
N
PF PF
8
475
PC
25
60
Over
M
all CBC
CBC : DC contactor
200
AF
CM2D
98
2560
dim
25
G
ensi
120
PF F F
145
ons t
5 5
H
436
2
E 74 110 90 C 90 J 116 A1 o
73
10
A 5000
15
A
f 12 150 Dimensions (mm)
and
A C E F G H J
112
more
44.5 25
Standard 725 110 65 18 14 342 135
77
PR
155
f 16
(6x) Doubleinsulation 820 165 80 33 10 344 175
CBC
25 50 50 with separator
200
insulation distance
98
voltage
� 220 150
M
200
N
120
M
160
N 256
> 220 200 240 150 200 0
54
69
f 12 150
Protusion A1
60.5
Number of
delayed blocks
Number of M(1)
type blocks
Double
insulation to
0 2 75 mm 90 mm
0 3 125 mm 140 mm 5
200
AM : mechanical latching with

0 4 125mm 140 mm
electrical release.
0
145

25 44.5
f 16
M : auxiliary contact blocks, (6x) 0 6 190 mm 205 mm
form to specify. 1 1 86 mm 101 mm
PC : contactor pole. 25 50 50 1 2 125 mm 140 mm
PF :attachment plane.
1 3 125 mm 140 mm
PR :rupturing pole 500 A
without overlapping 1 4 190 mm 205 mm
29
.
CBC 98 - 5000 1.0 Ts 600 V Ü

C
B
PC
25 50 50 50 50 AM
M
10
C
10
44.5 25
9
Ø16
256
34
200
(10x)
N
155
PF PF
PC
Over
M
all CBC
CBC : DC contactor
200
AF
CM2D
98
2560
dim
25
14
ensi
10 Ø16
120
PF 18 (10x) 18
145
25 44.5
25 50 50 50 50 25
ons t
342
2
C 65 74 90 90 175 116 A1 o
74
545 5000
A
250 and
Distance C more
44.5 25
Ø16
(10x)
Calibre 5000
Calibre 5500
mm 10
mm 15 CBC
155
25 50 50 50 50
200
Dinsulation distance
98
voltage
� 220 150
M
200
N
120
M
160
N 256
> 220 200 240 150 200 0
250
Protusion A1
Number of
delayed blocks
Number of M(1)
type blocks to
0 2 75 mm
0 3 125 mm 5
200
0 4 125mm
0
145
AM : mechanical latching with Ø16 0 5 190 mm

25 44.5
electrical release. (10x) 0 6 190 mm

M : auxiliary contact blocks, 25 50 50 50 50 25 1 2 125 mm
form to specify.
1 3 125 mm
SE : separator. 1 5 190 mm
29
.
CBC 98 - 5000 1.0 Ts 1000 V Ü

SE
C
B
10 PC PC
M
AM
C
10
256
200
34
PF
PF
155
N
475
PC
25 25
80
Over
M
all
50
CBC
200
CBC : DC contactor
AF
f 13 CM2D
(6x)
98
171
2560
dim
25
10
ensi
25
120
PF 145
33 33
ons t
342 86
436
2
C 80 94 90 90 165 175 116 A1 o
75
730 5000
250 A
25 50 50 50 50 and
Distance C D E more
44,5 25 Calibre 5000
Calibre 5500
mm
mm
10
10
405
425
30,3
40,3 CBC
155
Ø 16
Insulation distance
98
voltage
� 220 150
M
200
N
120
M
160
N 256
> 220 200 240 150 200 0
Protusion A1
Number of
delayed blocks
Number of M(1)
type blocks to
0 2 90 mm
Ø 16
0 3 140 mm 5
0 4 140mm
0
145
AM : mechanical latching with 0 5 205 mm
44,5
electrical release. 0 6 205 mm

25
M : auxiliary contact blocks, E 49,2 49,2 49,2 49,2 49,2 49,2 49,2 E 1 2 140 mm
form to specify.
PC : contactor pole. D
1 3 140 mm
SE : separator 1 5 205 mm
Field circuit breaker s (excitati on
contactors) from 80 to 6200 A
CEX 57 80,
CEX 57 150,
CEX 57 200,
CEX 75 400,
CEX 75 500,
CEX 75 630,
CEX 75 800,
CEX 75 1000,
CEX 71 1250,
CEX 71 1600,
CEX 71 2000,
CEX 98 2560,
CEX 54 3000,
CEX 98 3000,
CEX 98 5000,
CEX 60 5000,
CEX 60 5500,
CEX 60 6200.
CEX 71 1250 2.1

Reinforced insulation
Field circuit breakers - CEX 80 to 6200 A
A1 : complete thyristor bridge. Use Description

A2 : thyristor starter. Switching on and cutting off the excitation circuit of a ■ 1, 2 or 3 magnetic arc-blow-out contactor poles:
ALT : alternator.
C1 : contactor for field supply.
machine, inserting a discharge resistor at the terminals of - silver alloy contacts for calibre 80 to 5000 A.
EX : inductor. the inductor at the time of the break. - copper contacts (on request).
EXT : static excitation. The drawing below represents the static excitation circuit ■ One magnetic arc-blow-out dosing pole with overlapping
Ko : relay for regulation and release. of an alternator. with the contactor poles.
Rd : discharge resistor.
■ One mechanical latching with single or double electrical
T1 : excitation transformer.
release.
■ Magnetic circuit for over-excited coil supplied with DC
current:
- closing: economy resistor for calibre 80 to 200 A, deliv-
ered separately.
- opening: one NO contact connected in series with the
coil opens at the same time as the contactor.
■ Auxiliary contacts:
- range 80 to 200 A: 1 one M3 block type F102-Y with
C1 one NC overlap contact inserting the resistor, one NO
T1 contact switching off the tripping coil and one NO
ALT
contact available.
EX A1 - range 400 to 1000 A: two D-blocks, that is
2 NO + 2 NC contacts available and one M3 block type
Rd F102-Z with one overlap NC contact inserting the resis-
regulator
Voltage
tor, one NO contact switching off the tripping coil and

A2
Ko
one contact available.
= - range 1250 to 5000 A: one NC arc-blow-out contact
inserting the resistor, one M3 block type F102-Z with
one NO contact switching off the tripping coil,
EXT
1 NO + 1 NC contacts available.
Double CEX
Double CEX contactors (contactors for field supply) For a maximum pole switch-off voltage of:
ranging from 80 to 1000 A are equipped with a 2000 V for range 80 to 200 A,
mechanical coupling whereas double CEX contactors 2200 V for range 400 to 1000 A,
ranging from 1250 to 5000 A are equipped with a 2400 V for range1250 to 6200 A.
manual release system.
76
Field circuit breakers (excitation contactors) from 80 to 6200 A
Technical features
CEX 98 3200 2.1

Contactor pole 80 150 200 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2560 3200 3000 5000(10 5000 5500 6200
Génération 55/57 55/57 55/57 75 75 75 75 75 71 71 71 98 98 54 98 60 60 60
Thermal nominal current A 80 150 200 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2560 3200 3000 5000 5000 5500 6200
connecting section mm2 35 70 95 240 300 400 500 600 1000 1400 1600 1900 3000 3000 5000 5000 6000 7000
Operating voltage
two-pole or single-pole break V 500 500 500 550 550 550 550 550 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
three-polebreak V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
2 two-pole breaks in series V 1400 1400 1400 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
Insulating voltage
two-pole or single-pole break V 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000
three-polebreak V 6250 6250 6250 6250 6250 6250 6250 6250 6250 6250 6250 6250 6250 6250 6250
2 two-pole breaks in series V 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500 7500
Short-time current, t � 40°C
1s kA 1 1.75 2.5 10 12 14 24 26 41 30 65 43 36
5s kA 0.5 0.8 1.15 4.5 5.75 6.5 11 12.5 20 15 30 21.6 43 16 50 25 27 31
10 s kA 0.35 0.57 0.81 3.25 4 4.5 7.8 8.5 13.5 10.9 21 15.7 30 11.5 40 20 22 24.5
15 s kA 0,3 0.51 0.7 2.7 3.4 3.8 6.5 7 11.8 8.7 17.9 12.5 25.7 9.5 36 15 16.5 18.5
30 s kA 0.23 0.42 0.56 1.9 2.4 2.7 4.6 5 7.9 6 12 8.6 17.3 7 24 11 12 13.5
1 min kA 0.19 0.31 0.43 1.4 1.78 2 3.3 3.65 5.5 4.5 8.5 6.5 12.2 5.4 17 8.5 9 10.5
3 min kA 0.14 0.3 0.4 0.88 1.1 1.3 2 2.3 3.3 3 5 4.3 7.2 4 10 6.5 7 8
10 min kA 0.12 0.26 0.35 0.62 0.79 0.92 1.38 1.6 2 2.2 3.2 3.1 4.6 3.3 6.5 5.6 6 6.9
Maximum switch-off voltage
single-pole break V 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 700 700 700 700 700 600 700 600 600 600
1200/ 1200/ 1200/
two-pole break V 1000 1000 1000 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1500(3) 1500(3) 1500(3) 1500 1500 1200 1500 1200 1200 1200
three-pole break(1) V 1500 1500 1500 1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2100
1500/
2100
1500/
2100
1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/
2100 2100 1800 2100
four-pole break
V 2000 2000 2000 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 2400 3000 2400 2400 2400
(2 two-pole breaks in series)(1)
Current switch-off rating under a given voltage, with L/R=15 ms(1)
single-pole break under 500 V kA 0.5 1.4 3.5 8 8
550 V kA 6 7 7 18 18 23 23 23 23 23 35 23 35 35 35
700 V kA 15 15 15 15 15 15
two-pole break under 500 V kA 32 32 32 32 32 55 32 55 55 55
700 V kA 0.5 1.4 3.5 6 10 10 17 17 23 23 23 23 23 35 23 35 35 35
1000 V kA 0.25 0.7 1.75 5 7 7 10 10 19 19 19 19 19 35 19 35 35 35
1500 V(3) kA 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6
three-pole break under 1000 V kA 6 10 10 17 17 23 23 23 23 23 35 23 35 35 35
1500 V kA 5 7 7 10 10 19 19 19 19 19 24 19 24 24 24
1800 V kA 2 2.5 2.5 8 8 14 14 14 14 14 20 14 20 20 20
2000 V kA 1.5 2 2 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8
four-pole break 1000 V kA 30 30 30 30 30 55 30 55 55 55
(2 two-pole breaks in series) 2000 V kA 0.25 0.7 1.75 5 7 7 10 10 19 19 19 19 19 35 19 35 35 35
3000 V kA 5 5 5 5 5 5
(1) maximum switch-off voltage is directly linked to the current to cut (6) two pole break: one break on each line. •Temperature factor to apply to the power or to the current controlled
off, as well as to the different configurations (single-pole, two- (7) 800 A, on request. according to the ambient temperature (around the contactor).
pole, three-pole breaks, 2 two-pole break in series). (8) average consumption under 220 V. For ranges 80 to 2000 A, 54-3000, 60-5000, 60-5500 and
In onder to choose the best contactor, please consult our technical For other voltages, consult us.
department. (9) average consumption under 220 V with single pole or two-pole 60-6200 A, no derating up to 55° C.
(2) 500 A and 1000 A, on request. break on a single line only.
(3) dimensions given with separator between the poles. For other voltages, consult us. 1.04 40 < t < 45°C
(4) one single control circuit. (10) for 5500 A, lower section C = 15 mm. 1.08 45 < t � 50°C
(5) standard ratings for rupturing pole: 1.12 50 < t � 55°C
1.19 55 < t � 60°C
rupturing CEX 98 2560/3000 CEX 98 5000 Maximum
pole type of break type of break switch-off
rating (number of blow- (number od blow- voltage (V)
out poles) out poles)
500(7) 1 1 700
500(7) 2 2 1500
800 2(6) 1500
500(7) 3 3 2100
800 4 4 3000
77
Excitation contactors from 1250 to 5500 A
Technical features
CEX 98 3200 4.2
Contactor pole 80 150 200 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2560 3200 3000 5000(10 5000 5500 6200
Génération 55/57 55/57 55/57 75 75 75 75 75 71 71 71 98 98 54 98 60 60 60
Rupturing pole
Thermal nominal current 500/ 500/ 500/
A 80 80 150 400 400 400 400 400 500 500 500 800(2) 800(2) 800(2) 800(2)
800(5) 800(5) 800(5)
Current-switch-on rating kA 0.5 0.5 1.4 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8/10 8/10 10 8/10 10 10 10
Allowable curent for 15 s kA 0.35 0.35 0.8 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 5 5 5 5/9.5 5/9.5 9.5 5/9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5
Allowable curent for 0.5 s kA 1 1 1.75 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5/12 6.5/12 12 6.5/12 12 12 12
Resistive current switch-off rating kA 0.25 0.25 0.7 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8/10 8/10 10 8/10 10 10 10
Control circuit
Standard voltages V 24 - 48 - 110 125/127 - 220 - 440
Average consumption
on closing
single-pole or two-pole break
inrush W 43 43 77 500 500 500 800 800 500 500 500 3145(8) 3145(8) 1000 3145(9) 2600 2600 2600
hold W 43 43 43 30 30 30 70 70 42 42 42 225(8) 225(8) 66 225(9) 145 145 145
three-polebreak
inrush W 43 195 195 525 525 525 850 850 1600(8) 1600(8) 1600(8) 1100 3370(8)
hold W 43 74 74 35 35 35 75 75 110(8) 110(8) 110(8) 72 350(8)
2 two-pole breaks in series
inrush W 43(4) 86 154 1000 1000 1000 1600 1600 1000 1000 1000 3370(8) 3370(8) 2000 5200 5200 5200
hold W 43(4) 86 86 60 60 60 140 140 84 84 84 350(8) 350(8) 132 290 290 290
on opening
single-pole,two-poleorthree-polebreak W 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220
2 two-pole breaks in series W 220(4) 440 440 440 440 440 440 440 440 440 440 440 440 440 440
Opening time ms 25 25 25 50 50 50 50 50 60 60 60 90 90 60 70 60 60 60
Closing time ms 180 180 180 125 125 125 125 125 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
ConstantL/Rrate of closed electromagnet ms 140 140 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50
Total break time ms 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 85 85 85 90 90 85 90 85 85 85
(1) maximum switch-off voltage is directly linked to the current to cut (6) two pole break: one break on each line. •Temperature factor to apply to the power or to the current controlled
off, as well as to the different configurations (single-pole, two- (7) 800 A, on request. according to the ambient temperature (around the contactor).
pole, three-pole breaks, 2 two-pole break in series). (8) average consumption under 220 V. For ranges 80 to 2000 A, 54-3000, 60-5000, 60-5500 and
In onder to choose the best contactor, please consult our technical For other voltages, consult us. 60-6200 A, no derating up to 55° C.
department. (9) average consumption under 220 V with single pole or two-pole
(2) 500 A and 1000 A, on request. break on a single line only.
(3) dimensions given with separator between the poles. For other voltages, consult us. 1.04 40 < t < 45°C
(4) one single control circuit. (10) for 5500 A, lower section C = 15 mm. 1.08 45 < t � 50°C
(5) standard ratings for rupturing pole : 1.12 50 < t � 55°C
1.19 55 < t � 60°C
rupturing CEX 98 2560/3000 CEX 98 5000 Maximum
pole type of break type of break switch-off
rating (number of blow- (number od blow- voltage (V)
out poles) out poles)
500(7) 1 1 700
500(7) 2 2 1500
800 2(6) 1500
500(7) 3 3 2100
800 4 4 3000
78
30. CEX 57 80 - 150 - 200 1.1
AM
PR ØL Ø13 P PR PC TP M M
PC CM
M ØK C2
C2
147
B7
B3
N
B B4
B2 B6 B5
B1
210
ØK C1
ØL 15
PF
C C1
PF
37.5 S
50 100
Overall dimensions CEX 57 80 to 200 A

Ue : 500 VÜ
Single-pole break
15
A
E
Z
B B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 C C1 C2 ØK ØL
80 155,5 101 93 48 190 101 93 82 122 27 30 6 6
150 209,5 112 102 61 190 101 93 82 158 29 33 8 6
200 235 120 107 103 146 114 104 99 211 32 36 10 8
1 closing pole and 1 opening pole
Distance between the bearings : A AM: mechanical latching with
electrical release.
M type With mechanical latching with single electrical With mechanical latching with single electrical CM: magnetic circuit.
auxiliary Without mechanical latching release (foresee 1 NO contact for switching release (2 NO contacts for switching E: attachment centre distance
79
contacts off the release coil) off the release coils) (L = A + 75 mm).
Without delayed block With a delayed block Without delayed block With a delayed block Without delayed block With a delayed block M: M type auxiliary contact
NO NC 80 A 150 A 200 A 80 A 150 A 200 A 80 A 150 A 200 A 80 A 150 A 200 A 80 A 150 A 200 A 80 A 150 A 200 A block(1).
P: left bearing.
1 1 325 (2) 325 (2) 325 (3) 400 (3) 400 (3) 400 (4) 375 (2) 375 (2) 375 (3) 450 (3) 450 (3) 450 (4)
PC: contactor pole.
2 1 325 (2) 325 (2) 325 (3) 400 (3) 400 (3) 400 (4) 375 (2) 375 (2) 375 (3) 450 (3) 450 (3) 450 (4) 425 (2) 425 (2) 425 (3) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) PF: attachment plane.
2 2 325 (2) 325 (2) 325 (3) 400 (3) 400 (3) 400 (4) 375 (2) 375 (2) 375 (3) 450 (3) 450 (3) 450 (4) 425 (2) 425 (2) 425 (3) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) PR: rupturing pole.
3 2 325 (2) 325 (2) 325 (3) 400 (3) 400 (3) 400 (4) 375 (2) 375 (2) 375 (3) 450 (3) 450 (3) 450 (4) 425 (2) 425 (2) 425 (3) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) S: metallic support for «Ronis
type» lock for locking the con-
3 3 325 (2) 325 (2) 325 (3) 400 (3) 400 (3) 400 (4) 375 (2) 375 (2) 375 (3) 450 (3) 450 (3) 450 (4) 425 (2) 425 (2) 425 (3) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) tactor at rest (lock not sup-
4 3 375 (2) 375 (2) 375 (3) 450 (3) 450 (3) 450 (4) 425 (2) 425 (2) 425 (3) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) 475 (2) 475 (2) 475 (3) 550 (3) 550 (3) 550 (4) plied).
4 4 375 (2) 375 (2) 375 (3) 450 (3) 450 (3) 450 (4) 425 (2) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) 475 (2) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (3) 550 (4) TP: block with 2 delayed con-
5 4 375 (2) 375 (2) 375 (4) 450 (3) 450 (3) 450 (4) 425 (2) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) 475 (2) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (3) 550 (4) tacts(1).
Z: total length of the fixation
5 5 375 (2) 375 (3) 375 (4) 450 (3) 450 (3) 450 (4) 425 (3) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (3) 500 (4) 500 (4) 475 (3) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (4) 550 (4) bar (Z = A + 105 mm). Length
6 5 375 (2) 375 (3) 375 (4) 450 (3) 450 (4) 450 (4) 425 (3) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (3) 500 (4) 500 (4) 475 (3) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (4) 550 (4) increased on simple request, in
6 6 375 (3) 375 (3) 375 (4) 450 (3) 450 (4) 450 (4) 425 (3) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 475 (3) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) that case, please advise the
7 6 425 (3) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (3) 500 (4) 500 (4) 475 (3) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) position of the contactor on the
bar.
7 7 425 (3) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 475 (3) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4)
8 7 425 (3) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 475 (3) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4)
8 8 425 (3) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 475 (3) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4)
9 8 425 (3) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 475 (3) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4)
9 9 425 (3) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 500 (4) 475 (3) 475 (4) 475 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (3) 525 (4) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4)
(1) form to be specified.
Insulating distance (safety perimeter) (2) magnetic circuit n°63 (power-saved version available on request).
metallic walls insulated walls (3) magnetic circuit n°64.
(4) magnetic circuit n°64, power-saved version (Foresee one NC contact for inserting
Calibre � 250 V > 250 V � 250 V > 250 V the economy resistor).
M N M N M N M N Control circuit: for connection drawings, see p. 144.
80 55 45 110 80 45 35 90 65
150 105 75 125 95 85 60 105 75
200 165 135 235 185 130 105 185 145
31. CEX 57 80 - 150 - 200 2.1
AM
PR ØL Ø13 P AT PR PC TP M M
PC CM
M ØK C2
C2
147
B7
B3
N B4
B
B2 B6 B5
B1
210
ØK C1 28
ØL 15
PF
C C1
PF
37.5 A1 100 100 S

Ue : 500 VÜ
Two-pole break
15
A
E
Z
A1 B B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 C C1 C2 ØK ØL
80 (1) (6) 155,5 101 93 48 190 101 93 82 122 27 30 6 6
150 (1) 209,5 112 102 61 190 101 93 82 158 29 33 8 6
200 (1) 235 120 107 103 146 114 104 99 211 32 36 10 8
2 closing poles and one rupturing pole AM: mechanical latching with
electrical release.
Cote entre paliers : A AT: mechanical coupling for
M type With mechanical latching with single electrical With mechanical latching with single electrical connecting in series 2 equip-
auxiliary Without mechanical latching release (foresee 1 NO contact for switching release (2 NO contacts for switching ments with 2 contactor poles,
80
contacts off the release coil) off the release coils) for use under voltages > 500 V
Without delayed block With a delayed block Without delayed block With a delayed block Without delayed block With a delayed block and � 1000 V.
NO NC 80 A 150 A 200 A 80 A 150 A 200 A 80 A 150 A 200 A 80 A 150 A 200 A 80 A 150 A 200 A 80 A 150 A 200 A Superimposed contactors, cen-
tre distance: 400 mm.
1 1 425 (2) 425 (2) 425 (4) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) 475 (2) 475 (2) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (3) 550 (4) CM: magnetic circuit.
2 1 425 (2) 425 (2) 425 (4) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) 475 (2) 475 (2) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (3) 500 (4) 525 (2) 525 (2) 525 (4) 600 (3) 600 (3) 600 (4) E: attachment centre distance
2 2 425 (2) 425 (2) 425 (4) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) 475 (2) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (3) 550 (4) 525 (2) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (3) 600 (3) 600 (4) (L = A + 75 mm).
M: M type auxiliary contact
3 2 425 (2) 425 (2) 425 (4) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) 475 (2) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (3) 550 (4) 525 (2) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (3) 600 (3) 600 (4) block(5).
3 3 425 (2) 425 (3) 425 (4) 500 (3) 500 (3) 500 (4) 475 (2) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (2) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (3) 600 (4) 600 (4) P: left bearing.
4 3 475 (2) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (3) 550 (4) 525 (2) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (3) 600 (4) 600 (4) 575 (2) 575 (3) 575 (4) 650 (3) 650 (4) 650 (4) PC: contactor pole.
4 4 475 (2) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (2) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (3) 600 (4) 600 (4) 575 (2) 575 (3) 575 (4) 650 (3) 650 (4) 650 (4) PF: attachment plane.
PR: rupturing pole.
5 4 475 (2) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (3) 600 (4) 600 (4) 575 (3) 575 (3) 575 (4) 650 (3) 650 (4) 650 (4) S: metallic support for «Ronis
5 5 475 (2) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (3) 600 (4) 600 (4) 575 (3) 575 (3) 575 (4) 650 (3) 650 (4) 650 (4) type» lock for locking the con-
6 5 475 (2) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (3) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 575 (3) 575 (3) 575 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4) tactor at rest (lock not sup-
6 6 475 (3) 475 (3) 475 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 550 (4) 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) plied).
575 (3) 575 (3) 575 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4)
TP: block with 2 delayed con-
7 6 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 575 (3) 575 (3) 575 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4) 625 (3) 625 (3) 625 (4) 700 (4) 700 (4) 700 (4) tacts(5).
7 7 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 575 (3) 575 (3) 575 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4) 625 (3) 625 (3) 625 (4) 700 (4) 700 (4) 700 (4) Z: total length of the fixation
8 7 525 (3) 525 (3) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 575 (3) 575 (4) 575 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4) 625 (3) 625 (4) 625 (4) 700 (4) 700 (4) bar (Z = A + 105 mm).
8 8 525 (3) 525 (4) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 575 (3) 575 (4) 575 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4) 625 (3) 625 (4) 625 (4) 700 (4) 700 (4) Length increased on simple
request, in that case, please
9 8 525 (3) 525 (4) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 575 (3) 575 (4) 575 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4) 625 (3) 625 (4) 625 (4) 700 (4) 700 (4) advise the position of the con-
9 9 525 (3) 525 (4) 525 (4) 600 (4) 600 (4) 575 (3) 575 (4) 575 (4) 650 (4) 650 (4) 625 (3) 625 (4) 625 (4) 700 (4) 700 (4) tactor on the bar.
Insulating distance (safety perimeter) (1) U � 500 V: A1 = 50 mm (without AT)

metallic walls insulated walls U > 500 V and � 1000 V: A1 = 78 mm
(space available for AT), PLEASE CONSULT US for total overall dimensions.
Calibre � 250 V > 250 V � 250 V > 250 V (2) magnetic circuit n° 63 (power-saved version available on request).
(3) magnetic circuit n° 64.
M N M N M N M N (4) magnetic circuit n° 64, power-saved version (Foresee one NC contact for inserting
80 55 45 110 80 45 35 90 65 the economy resistor).
(5) forme to be specified.
150 105 75 125 95 85 60 105 75 (6) for contactor mounted on a single bar, PLEASE CONSULT US for a total overall dimensions:
200 165 135 235 185 130 105 185 145 A1 = 50 mm.
Single-pole break and two-pole break
Ue : 500 VÜ
32. CEX 75 400 - 500 - 630 - 800 - 1000
PR PF P PR PC TP M F201Y R AM D
15 13 5 A2 A3
Ø 12
PF PF 155
112
77
125 AT
14
=
=
80 95
Ø 12
49
PF 100.5 90 A1
15 E 15
PC PF
Connecting section for closing pole 800 and 1000 A
M C1
25
12
ØK 2
ØK
B4
B3 25
68
25
16
N 37.5
125
125 TF
B1 B2
50
ØL 37.5
C2 ØL
C PF 23
10
12.5 12.5 20
AP PF
AM: mechanical latching with electrical release. M: M type auxiliary contact block(1) with 2 or 3 instant contacts(1).
AT: mechanical coupling for connecting in series 2 equipements P: left bearing.
with 2 contactor poles, for use under voltages > 500 V and PC: contactor pole.
� 1000 V. PF: attachment plane.
Superimposed contactors, centre distance: 500 mm. PR: rupturing pole.
D: block with two instant contacts (1NO + 1NF). R: economy resistor.
TP: block with 2 delayed contacts(1).
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 B4 C C1 C2 ØK ØL
400 90 13 5 65 80 77 112 256 15 30 12 12
500/630 100 12 8 65 80 77 112 256 15 30 12 12
800/1000 110 16 12 60 70 (2) 186 291 (2) 0 8 8
Attachment centre distance E Insulating distance (safety perimeter)

1 pole 2 poles metallic walls insulated walls
� 300 V > 300 V � 300 V > 300 V
1M 1M+1TP 1M 1M+1TP
M N M N M N M N
400 575 650 650 725 100 30 100 40 40 30 40 30
500/630 575 650 675 750 150 50 150 70 60 40 70 60
800/1000 600 675 700 775 75 75 155 75 75 75 155 75

(2) see connecting section.
81
33. CEX 75 400 to 1000 1.1
25
12
PC PF PR PF P PR PC TP M F201Y R AM D 2
M C1 15 A2 A3
13 5 ØK
ØK
Ø 12 25
PF PF 155 68
B4 112 25
B3 77 16
37.5
N
AT TF
(7)
125 125 CM 200 125
14
=
50
=
ØL 37.5
B1 B2 80 95 15
23
12,5 141 12.5
ØL Ø 12
C2 49 52.5 10
63 90 S
C PF PF 12.5 12.5 20
AP PF
A
LEN version: Z = A + 105 mm, or more on request ∆
LER reduced version: Z = A + 30 mm

Ue : 500 VÜ
Single-pole break
A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 B4 C C1 C2 ØK ØL
400 13 5 65 80 77 112 256 15 30 12 12
500/630 12 8 65 80 77 112 256 15 30 12 12
800/1000 16 12 60 70 (7) 186 291 (7) 0 8 8
1 closing pole and 1 openig pole AM: mechanical latching with sin-
Distance between the bearings: A gle or double electrical release.
M type
auxiliary Without mechanical With mechanical latching With mechanical latching With mechanical latching With mechanical latching AT: mechanical coupling for con-
with single electrical release with double electrical release with single electrical release with double electrical release necting in series 2 equipments with
contacts(8) latching(4) without delayed block (5) without delayed block (6) with delayed block (5) with delayed block (6) 2 contactor poles, for use under
NO NC 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000 voltages > 500 V and � 1000 V.
1 2 375 (2) 375 (2) 400 (3) 450 (2) 450 (2) 475 (3) 525 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) Superimposed contactors, centre
82
2 1 distance: 500 mm.

375 (2) 375 (2) 400 (3) 450 (2) 450 (2) 475 (3) 525 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 525 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 600 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) CM: magnetic circuit. This one can
3 2 400 (2) 425 (2) 450 (3) 500 (2) 500 (2) 525 (3) 575 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 575 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 650 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) be mounted on the left side of the
3 3 400 (2) 425 (2) 450 (3) 500 (2) 500 (2) 525 (3) 575 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 575 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 650 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) contactor without any information,
4 3 400 (2) 425 (2) 450 (3) 500 (2) 500 (2) 525 (3) 575 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 575 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 650 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) it is always mounted on the right
4 4 400 (2) 425 (2) 450 (3) 500 (2) 500 (2) 525 (3) 575 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 575 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 650 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) side of the contactor.
5 4 400 (2) 425 (2) 450 (3) 500 (2) 500 (2) 525 (3) 575 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 575 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 650 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) D: block with 2 instant contacts on
5 5 450 (2) 475 (2) 500 (3) 550 (2) 550 (2) 575 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 700 (2) 700 (2) 725 (3) standard version; 2 additional
6 5 450 (2) 475 (2) 500 (3) 550 (2) 550 (2) 575 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 700 (2) 700 (2) 725 (3) blocks can be added on request.
6 6 M: M type auxiliary contact
450 (2) 475 (2) 500 (3) 550 (2) 550 (2) 575 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 700 (2) 700 (2) 725 (3) block(1).
7 6 450 (2) 475 (2) 500 (3) 550 (2) 550 (2) 575 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 700 (2) 700 (2) 725 (3) P: left bearing.
7 7 450 (2) 475 (2) 500 (3) 550 (2) 550 (2) 575 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 700 (2) 700 (2) 725 (3) PC: contactor pole.
8 7 450 (2) 475 (2) 500 (3) 550 (2) 550 (2) 575 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 700 (2) 700 (2) 725 (3) PF: attachment plane.
8 8 500 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 600 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 750 (2) 750 (2) 775 (3) PR: rupturing pole 400
9 8 500 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 600 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 750 (2) 750 (2) 775 (3) A. R: economy resistor.
9 9 500 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 600 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 750 (2) 750 (2) 775 (3) TP: block with 2 delayed con-
775 (3) tacts .
(1)
10 9 500 (2) 525 (2) 500 (3) 600 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 750 (2) 750 (2)
10 10 S: metallic support for «Ronis
500 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 600 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 750 (2) 750 (2) 775 (3) type» lock for locking the contac-
11 10 500 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 600 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 675 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 750 (2) 750 (2) 775 (3) tor at rest (lock not supplied).
11 11 550 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 650 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) 725 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 725 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 800 (2) 800 (2) 825 (3) ∆ in that case, please advise the
12 11 550 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 650 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) 725 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 725 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 800 (2) 800 (2) 825 (3) position of the contactor on the
12 12 550 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 650 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) 725 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 725 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 800 (2) 800 (2) 825 (3) bars.
Insulating distance (safety perimeter) (1) form to be specified.
metallic walls insulated walls (2) magnetic circuit n° 16 R, power-saved version.
(3) magnetic circuit n° 18, power-saved version.
Calibre � 300 V > 300 V � 300 V > 300 V (4) foresee 1 overlapping NC for inserting the economy resistor(s).
(5) foresee 1 overlapping NC for inserting the economy resistor(s) and 1 NO for switching off the
M N M N M N M N release coil
400 100 30 100 40 40 30 40 30 (6) foresee 1 overlapping NC for inserting the economy resistor(s) and 2 NO for switching off the
release coil.
500/630 150 50 150 70 60 40 70 60 (7) detailed connections for pole 800 and 1000 A.
800/1000 75 75 155 75 75 75 155 75 (8) should you require other versions, please consult our technical department.
Control circuit: for connecting drawings, see p. 144.
34. CEX 75 400 to 1000 2.1
25
12
PC PF PR PF P PR PC TP M F201Y R AM D 2
M C1 15 A2 A3
13 5 ØK
ØK 25
Ø 12
PF PF 155 68
B4 112 25
B3 77 16
37.5
N
AT TF
(7) 125 125 CM 200 125
14
=
50
=
ØL 37.5
B1 B2 80 95 15
23
141 12.5
ØL Ø 12 12.5
52.5 10
C2 49 63 90 A1 S 20
C PF PF 12.5 12.5
AP PF
A

Ue : 500 VÜ
Two-pole break
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 B4 C C1 C2 ØK ØL
400 90 13 5 65 80 77 112 256 15 30 12 12
500/630 100 12 8 65 80 77 112 256 15 30 12 12
800/1000 110 16 12 60 70 (7) 186 291 (7) 0 8 8
2 closing poles and 1 opening pole AM: mechanical latching with sin-
Distance between the bearings: A gle or double electrical release.
M type
auxiliary Without mechanical With mechanical latching With mechanical latching With mechanical latching With mechanical latching AT: mechanical coupling for con-
with single electrical release with double electrical release with single electrical release with double electrical release necting in series 2 equipments
contact(8) latching(4) without delayed block(5) without delayed block(6) with delayed block(5) with delayed block(6) with 2 contactor poles, for use
NO NC 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000 under voltages > 500 V and
1 2 � 1000 V. Superimposed contac-
83
450 (2) 475 (2) 550 (3) 550 (2) 550 (2) 600 (3) 600 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3)
2 1 tors, centre distance: 500 mm.
450 (2) 475 (2) 550 (3) 550 (2) 550 (2) 600 (3) 625 (2) 625 (2) 675 (3) 600 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 675 (2) 700 (2) 725 (3) CM: magnetic circuit. This one can
3 2 500 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 575 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) 650 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 650 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 725 (2) 750 (2) 775 (3) be mounted on the left side of the
3 3 500 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 575 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) 650 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 650 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 725 (2) 750 (2) 775 (3) contactor without any informa-
4 3 500 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 575 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) 650 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 650 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 725 (2) 750 (2) 775 (3) tion, it is always mounted on the
4 4 500 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 575 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) 650 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 650 (2) 675 (3) 700 (3) 725 (2) 750 (3) 775 (3) right side of the contactor.
5 4 500 (2) 525 (2) 550 (3) 575 (2) 600 (2) 625 (3) 650 (2) 675 (2) 700 (3) 650 (2) 675 (3) 700 (3) 725 (2) 750 (3) 775 (3) D: block with 2 instant contacts on
5 5 550 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 625 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) 700 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 700 (2) 725 (3) 750 (3) 775 (2) 800 (3) 825 (3) standard version; 2 additional
6 5 blocks can be added on request.
550 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 625 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) 700 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 700 (2) 725 (3) 750 (3) 775 (2) 800 (3) 825 (3) M: M type auxiliary contact
6 6 550 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 625 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) 700 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 700 (2) 725 (3) 750 (3) 775 (2) 800 (3) 825 (3) block(1).
7 6 550 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 625 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) 700 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 700 (2) 725 (3) 750 (3) 775 (2) 800 (3) 825 (3) P: left bearing.
7 7 550 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 625 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) 700 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 700 (2) 725 (3) 750 (3) 775 (2) 800 (3) 825 (3) PC: contactor pole.
8 7 550 (2) 575 (2) 600 (3) 625 (2) 650 (2) 675 (3) 700 (2) 725 (2) 750 (3) 700 (2) 725 (3) 750 (3) 775 (2) 800 (3) 825 (3) PF: attachment plane.
8 8 600 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 675 (2) 700 (2) 725 (3) 750 (2) 775 (2) 800 (3) 750 (2) 775 (3) 800 (3) 825 (2) 850 (3) 875 (3) PR: rupturing pole 400
9 8 600 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 675 (2) 700 (2) 725 (3) 750 (2) 775 (2) 800 (3) 750 (2) 775 (3) 800 (3) 825 (2) 850 (3) 875 (3) A. R: economy resistor.
9 9 600 (2) 625 (2) 650 (3) 675 (2) 725 (3) 725 (3) 750 (2) 800 (3) 800 (3) 750 (2) 775 (3) 800 (3) 825 (2) 850 (3) 875 (3) TP: block with 2 delayed con-
10 9 tacts(1).
600 (2) 650 (3) 650 (3) 675 (2) 725 (3) 725 (3) 750 (2) 800 (3) 800 (3) 750 (2) 775 (3) 800 (3) 825 (2) 850 (3) 875 (3) S: metallic support for «Ronis
10 10 600 (2) 650 (3) 650 (3) 675 (2) 725 (3) 725 (3) 750 (2) 800 (3) 800 (3) 750 (2) 775 (2) 800 (3) 825 (2) 850 (3) 875 (3) type» lock for locking the contac-
11 10 600 (2) 650 (3) 650 (3) 675 (2) 725 (3) 725 (3) 750 (2) 800 (3) 800 (3) 750 (2) 775 (3) 800 (3) 825 (2) 850 (3) 875 (3) tor at rest (lock not supplied).
11 11 650 (2) 700 (3) 700 (3) 725 (2) 775 (3) 775 (3) 800 (2) 850 (3) 850 (3) 800 (2) 825 (3) 850 (3) 875 (2) 900 (3) 925 (3) ∆ in that case, please advise the
12 11 650 (2) 700 (3) 700 (3) 725 (2) 775 (3) 775 (3) 800 (2) 850 (3) 850 (3) 800 (2) 825 (3) 850 (3) 875 (2) 900 (3) 925 (3) position of the contactor on the
12 12 650 (2) 700 (3) 700 (3) 725 (2) 775 (3) 775 (3) 800 (2) 850 (3) 850 (3) 800 (2) 825 (3) 850 (3) 875 (2) 900 (3) 925 (3) bars.
(2) magnetic circuit n° 16 R, power-saved version.
metallic walls insulated walls (3) magnetic circuit n° 18, power-saved version.
Calibre (4) foresee 1 overlapping NC for inserting the economy resistor(s).
� 300 V > 300 V � 300 V > 300 V (5) foresee 1 overlapping NC for inserting the economy resistor(s) and 1 NO for switching off the
M N M N M N M N release coil
400 100 30 100 40 40 30 40 30 (6) foresee 1 overlapping NC for inserting the economy resistor(s) and 2 NO for switching off the
release coil.
500/630 150 50 150 70 60 40 70 60 (7) detailed connections for pole 800 and 1000 A.
800/1000 75 75 155 75 75 75 155 75 (8) should you require other versions, please consult our technical department.
Control circuit: for connecting drawings, see p. 144.
35. CEX 75 400 to 1000 3.1
25
12
PC PF PR PF P PR PC A2 SE PC A2 SE PC TP M F201Y R AM D 2
M C1 15 13 5 A3 A3 ØK
ØK
Ø 12 25
PF PF 155 68
B4 112 25
B3 77 16
37.5
N
AT
(7) 125 125 CM 200 125 TF
14
=
50
=
ØL 37.5
B1 B2 80 95 15
141 23
ØL Ø 12 12.5 12.5
C2 52.5 10
49 108 A4 A1 A1 S
C PF PF 12.5 12.5 20
AP PF
A

Ue : 1000 VÜ
Three-pole break
A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 C C1 C2 ØK ØL
400 102 13 5 110 65 80 77 112 256 15 30 12 12
500/630 120 12 8 110 65 80 77 112 256 15 30 12 12
800/1000 138 16 12 135 60 70 (7) 186 291 (7) 0 8 8
1 closing pole on the positive polarity, 1 closing pole on the negative polarity and 1 opening pole
Distance between the bearings: A AM: mechanical latching with single
M type or double electrical release.
auxiliary Without mechanical With mechanical latching With mechanical latching With mechanical latching With mechanical latching
with single electrical release with double electrical release with single electrical release with double electrical release AT: mechanical coupling for connect-
contacts(8) latching(4) without delayed block (5) without delayed block (6) with delayed block(5) with delayed block(6) ing in series 2 equipments with 2 con-
tactor poles, for use under voltages >
NO NC 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000 400 500/630 800/1000
1 2 500 V and � 1000 V. Superimposed
650 (2) 725 (3) 800 (3) 725 (2) 800 (3) 875 (3) 800 (2) 850 (3) 925 (3) contactors, centre distance: 500 mm.
84
2 1 650 (2) 725 (3) 800 (3) 725 (2) 800 (3) 875 (3) 800 (2) 875 (3) 950 (3) 800 (2) 850 (3) 925 (3) 875 (2) 925 (3) CM: magnetic circuit. This one can be
3 2 700 (2) 775 (3) 850 (3) 775 (2) 850 (3) 925 (3) 850 (2) 925 (3) 850 (2) 900 (3) 925 (2) mounted on the left side of the con-
3 3 700 (2) 775 (3) 850 (3) 775 (2) 850 (3) 925 (3) 850 (2) 925 (3) 850 (2) 900 (3) 925 (2) tactor without any information, it is
4 3 700 (2) 775 (3) 850 (3) 775 (2) 850 (3) 925 (3) 850 (2) 925 (3) 850 (2) 900 (3) 925 (2) always mounted on the right side of
4 4 700 (2) 775 (3) 850 (3) 775 (2) 850 (3) 925 (3) 850 (2) 925 (3) 850 (2) 900 (3) 925 (2) the contactor.
5 4 D: block with 2 instant contacts on
700 (2) 775 (3) 850 (3) 775 (2) 850 (3) 925 (3) 850 (2) 925 (3) 850 (2) 900 (3) 925 (2) standard version; 2 additional blocks
5 5 750 (2) 825 (3) 900 (3) 825 (2) 900 (3) 900 (2) 900 (2) 950 (3) can be added on request.
6 5 750 (2) 825 (3) 900 (3) 825 (2) 900 (3) 900 (2) 900 (2) 950 (3) M: M type auxiliary contact block(1).
6 6 750 (2) 825 (3) 900 (3) 825 (2) 900 (3) 900 (2) 900 (2) 950 (3) P: left bearing.
7 6 750 (2) 825 (3) 900 (3) 825 (2) 900 (3) 900 (2) 900 (2) 950 (3) PC: contactor pole.
7 7 750 (2) 825 (3) 900 (3) 825 (2) 900 (3) 900 (2) 900 (2) 950 (3) PF: attachment plane.
8 7 750 (2) 825 (3) 900 (3) 825 (2) 900 (3) 900 (2) 900 (2) 950 (3) PR: rupturing pole 400
8 8 800 (2) 875 (3) 950 (3) 875 (2) 950 (3) 950 (2) 950 (2) A. R: economy resistor.
9 8 TP: block with 2 delayed contacts(1).
800 (2) 875 (3) 950 (3) 875 (2) 950 (3) 950 (2) 950 (2) S: metallic support for «Ronis type»
9 9 800 (2) 875 (3) 950 (3) 875 (2) 950 (3) 950 (2) 950 (2) lock for locking the contactor at rest
10 9 800 (2) 875 (3) 950 (3) 875 (2) 950 (3) 950 (2) 950 (2) (lock not supplied).
10 10 800 (2) 875 (3) 950 (3) 875 (2) 950 (3) 950 (2) 950 (2) ∆ in that case, please advise the posi-
11 10 800 (2) 875 (3) 950 (3) 875 (2) 950 (3) 950 (2) 950 (2) tion of the contactor on the bars.
11 11 850 (2) 925 (3) 925 (2)
12 11 850 (2) 925 (3) 925 (2)
12 12 850 (2) 925 (3) 925 (2)
(2) magnetic circuit n° 16 R, power-saved version.
metallic walls insulated walls (3) magnetic circuit n° 18, power-saved version.
(4) foresee 1 overlapping NC for inserting the economy resistor(s).
Calibre > 300 V > 300 V (5) foresee 1 overlapping NC for inserting the economy resistor(s) and 1 NO for switching off the
M N M N release coil
400 100 40 40 30 (6) foresee 1 overlapping NC for inserting the economy resistor(s) and 2 NO for switching off the
release coil.
500/630 150 70 70 60 (7) detailed connections for pole 800 and 1000 A.
(8) should you require other versions, please consult our technical department.
800/1000 155 75 155 75 Control circuit: for connecting drawings, see p. 144.
36. CEX 71 1250 - 1600 - 2000
P PR PC SE PC AT AM F/O TP R
PC
M
12 8
256
RA 1250 200 RA 1600-2000 PF PF
Ø8 Ø8
15
N 12.5
25
25 25
15
12.5
12.5 12.5 200
25 M
25 5 CM 2 D
15 5
12.5 F102Z

171
Single-pole and two-pole break

25 14
=
25 25
25
=
12.5 15 120
18
342 86 37 10
PF S
65 ∆ C B
74 18
A∆ A1
PR
Z
PF
Ø 12 15
85
112
77 AM: mechanical latching with single or double electrical release. Voltage V A B C
AT: mechanical coupling for connecting in series 2 equipments of 1 pole � 550 435 110 110
2 contactor poles, for use under voltages > 500 V and � 1000 V.
2 poles � 550(2) 545(2) 110 110
Superimposed contactors, centre distance: 625 mm.
2 poles(3) > 550 655 165 138
CM2D: magnetic circuit.
F/O: insertion contact for the economy resistor.
200
M: M type auxiliary contact block(1).
P: left bearing. metallic walls insulated walls
Voltage V
PC: contactor pole. M N M N
PF: attachment plane. � 220 150 200 120 160
PR: rupturing pole 500 A. > 220 200 240 150 200
54 69 R: economy resistor.
RA: connecting sections.
S: metallic support for «Ronis type» lock for locking the contactor at rest
Protrusion A1
Ø 12 60.5 (lock not supplied). Number of Number of M
PF
TP: block with 2 delayed contacts(1). delayed blocks blocks(1)
Z: total length of the fixation bars (Z = E + A1 + 65 mm). Length 0 2 75 mm
increased on simple request. 0 3 125 mm
(2) for use under voltages > 550 and � 1100 V, manual release system AT has to be
0 4 125mm
mounted. 0 5 190 mm
(3) dimensions with separator. 0 6 190 mm
∆: add 40 mm for an old coupling system. 1 1 86 mm
1 2 125 mm
1 3 125 mm
1 4 190 mm
1 5 190 mm
37. CEX 71 1250 - 1600 - 2000 3.1
P PR PC SE PC SE PC AM F/O TP R
PC
M
12 8
256
RA 1250 200 RA 1600-2000 PF
PF
Ø8 Ø8
15
N 12.5
25
25 25
12.5 15
200
12,5 M
25 12.5 25 5 5 CM 2 D
15
Overall dimensions CEX 71 1250 and 2000 A

F102Z
Ue : 1000 VÜ
Three-pole break
12.5
171
14
25
=
25 25
=
12.5 25 15
18 37 10 120 18
342 86
PF S
65 107 143 143 143
820 A1
PR
PF Z
Ø 12
15
86
112
77 AM: mechanical latching with single or double electrical release. Insulating distance (safety perimeter)
CM2D: magnetic circuit. M N
F/O: insertion contact for the economy resistor.
M: M type auxiliary contact block(1).
metallic walls 200 240
P: left bearing. insulated walls 150 200
PC: contactor pole.
PF: attachment plane. Protrusion A1
PR: rupturing pole 500 A. Number of M blocks(1)
R: economy resistor.
1 75 mm
RA: connecting sections.
S: metallic support for «Ronis type» lock for locking the contactor at 2 75 mm
54 69 rest (lock not supplied). 3 125 mm
SE: separator. 4 125 mm
Z: total length of the fixation bars (Z = 885 + A1). 5 175 mm
Ø 12 60.5 (1) form to be specified. 6 175 mm
PF
38. CEX 54 3000 - 60 5000 2.2
PR PC AM R
M PC
PF
B3 PF PF B5
B4
Ø 13 8
12
F/O
N 25
50
CM
25
475 TP
50 25
25
Overall dimensions CEX 54 3000 to 60 5000 A

Ue : 600 VÜ
50 B2
B1
M
C C1 A1 120 A2 A3
PF 120
S
87
18 E 18
AM: mechanical latching with single or double electrical release.

AP: pole axis. PR: 2 rupturing poles 500 A.
CM: magnetic circuit. R: economy resistor.
Ø 12 F/O: insertion contact for the economy resistor. S: metallic support for «Ronis type» lock for locking the contactor at rest
PR M: M type auxiliary contact block(1). (lock not supplied).
PC: contactor pole. TP: block with 2 delayed contacts(1).
PF: attachment plane. (1) form to be specified.
77 E E
PF A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 C C1
1pole 2 poles
3000 930 1110 149 144 180 118 250 110.5 14.5 136 408 146
5000 1000 1230 164 169 230 127 252 119.5 16 141 427 130
347 Connecting sections
Insulating distance (safety perimeter) 3000 5000

Voltage V 5.1 5.1
M N M N 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1
3000 � 300 200 100 100 65
> 300 400 300 200 100
5000 � 300 400 400 250 250
Ø 12 > 300 - - 250 250 5 5 5 5
PF 5 5 5
65,6 5 92.2
100 5.1
5.1
5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1
AP AP
5 5 5 5
5 5 5
5
39. CEX 54 3000 to 60 5000 2.1
PC PR PC AM R
M
PF PF PF
B3 B5
B4
Ø 13
F/O
N 25
50
CM
25
475 TP
50 25
25

Ue : 600 VÜ
50 B2
B1
M
C C1 A1 A2 A3
PF 120
S
18 E 18
88
AM: mechanical latching with single or double electrical release.

AP: pole axis. PR: rupturing pole 800 A or 1000 A.
CM: magnetic circuit. R: economy resistor.
F/O: insertion contact for the economy resistor. S: metallic support for «Ronis type» lock for locking the contactor at rest
M Ø8 M: M type auxiliary contact block(1). (lock not supplied).
25
25 205
E E
80 A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 C C1
1 pole 2 poles
3000 815 995 165 190 180 118 250 110.5 14.5 136 408 146
475
5000 885 1115 180 215 230 127 252 119.5 16 141 427 130
120
Connecting sections
Insulating distance (safety perimeter) 3000 5000

146 metallic walls insulated walls
Voltage V 5.1 5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
M N M N
PR
18 3000 � 300 200 100 100 65
M Ø12
126
> 300 400 300 200 100
337 5000 � 300 400 400 250 250
> 300 - - 250 250 5
5
5 5
5 5
5
65,6 5 92.2
5.1 5.1
5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1
AP AP
5 5 5 5
5 5 5
5
40. CEX 54 3000 3.1
PR SE PC SE PC SE PC SE AM R
M PC SE
PF
B3 PF PF B5
B4
Ø 13
F/O
N
25
50
CM
25
475 TP
Overall dimensions CEX 54 3000 A

50 25
Ue : 1000 VÜ
Three-pole break
25
50 B2
B1
M
C C1
PF A1 A2 A3 A3 120
S
89
18 E 18
AM: mechanical latching with single or double electrical release. PR: rupturing pole 800 A or 1000 A.
AP: pole axis. R: economy resistor.
CM: magnetic circuit. S: metallic support for «Ronis type» lock for locking the contactor at rest
F/O: insertion contact for the economy resistor. (lock not supplied).
25 M Ø8 M: M type auxiliary contact block(1). SE: separator.
25 205
80 E A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 C C1
3000 1474 201 226 216 118 250 110.5 14.5 136 408 146
475
120 Connecting sections
Insulating distance (safety perimeter) 5.1 5.1

M N
metallic walls 400 300
146
insulated walls 250 150
PR 5 5
18
5
M Ø12 65.6
126
337
5.1 5.1
AP
5 5
5
41. Double CEX 54 3000 - 60 5000
PR SE PC SE PC SE AM R
350 C
PF
220 PF PF
SE
C1 Ø 13
12 8 12 8
PC F/O
25
50
25 TP
475
CM
25
50
Overall dimensions CEX 3000 to 5000 A

Ue : 1500 VÜ
2 two-pole break in series
50
25
16
M
775 300
AM
PR 775
Ø 12 77
90
C1
F/O
25
50
25 TP
347 475
CM
25
50
B2 B1
18
50 25
B3
Ø 12
M
100 172 120 265 300
18 1454 18
AM: mechanical latching with single or double electrical release. R: economy resistor.
AP: pole axis. S: metallic support for «Ronis type» lock for locking the contactor at rest
CM: magnetic circuit. (lock not supplied).
F/O: insertion contact for the economy resistor. SE: separator.
M: M type auxiliary contact block(1). TP: block with 2 delayed contacts(1).
PC: contactor pole. (1) form to be specified.
PR: rupturing pole 800 A or 1000 A.
B1 B2 B3 C C1
3000 193 250 26.5 426.5 146
5000 202 252 31 430 130
42. Double CEX 54 3000 - 60 5000
PR SE PC SE PC SE AM R
350 C
PF
220 PF PF
SE
C1 Ø 13
PC F/O
25
50
25 TP
475
CM
25

50
Ue : 1500 VÜ
Four-pole break
50
25
775 300
AM
775
SE
91
25 M Ø8
C1
25 205 F/O
25
80 50
25 TP
475 475
CM
120
25
50
B2 B1
146
PR
50 18
18 25
M Ø12 B3
337
M
A1 A2 A3
18 E 18
AM: mechanical latching with single or double electrical release. R: economy resistor.
AP: pole axis. S: metallic support for «Ronis type» lock for locking the contactor at rest
CM: magnetic circuit. (lock not supplied).
F/O: insertion contact for the economy resistor. SE: separator.
M: M type auxiliary contact block(1). TP: block with 2 delayed contacts(1).
PC: contactor pole. (1) form to be specified.
PR: rupturing pole 800 A or 1000 A.
E A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 C C1
3000 1292 180 265 250 193 250 26.5 426.5 146
5000 1386 180 311 300 202 252 31 430 130
43. CEX 98 2560-3200 1.1 Ts 600 V Ü

PC
AM
M
25
10 5 150
PR
256
200
Ø16
44.5
34
155
N (6x)
155
PF PF 50 50
200
25
PC
200
AF
CM2D 150
25
14
120
PF 18
145
18
145
44.5
105 Ø16
342 (6x)
2
10 65 74 110 90 159 549 116 A1 25 50 50
25
AF: attachment axis.
AM: mechanical latching with
electrical release.
PC: contactor pole.
44. CEX 98 2560-3200 1.1 Ts 1000 V Ü PF: attachment plane.
PR: rupturing pole 500 A with
overlapping.
SE
SE: separator.
PC PC
AM
M
10 5 150
PR
44.5 25
256
200
34 Ø16
N (6x)
155
155
PF PF 50 50
200
475
25
PC
25 25
80
50
200
AF
Ø13 CM2D 315
171
(6x)
25
200
14
25
120
PF
145
18 18
145
100
25 44.5
342 86 213.5 Ø16
(8x)
436
2
65 74 110 90 165 165 116 A1 50 50 50
10
32.5
720
45. Rupturing pole 500 A with overlapping

Insulating distance (safety perimeter) Protrusion A1
metallic walls insulated walls Number of Number of M
Ø12
15
voltage V delayed blocks type blocks(1)
M N M N
112
� 220 150 200 120 160 0 2 75 mm

77
PR > 220 200 240 150 200 0 3 125 mm

0 4 125mm
0 5 190 mm
0 6 190 mm
1 1 86 mm
1 2 125 mm
54
69
1 3 125 mm
Ø12
60.5 1 4 190 mm
1 5 190 mm
92
46.
SE
C
PC PC
AM
E
M
10
PR
5 X
9
200
256
34
155
N
8
PF PF
475
25
PC
60
-
32 O Field
00 ve
200
ra
AF
ll cir
CM2D
cu
25
14
di
120
PF 18 18
145
it
m
342 105 255
436
e br
2
65 74 110 90 165 90 175 116 A1
93
10
820
AF: attachment axis. ns ea

25 15 150
electrical release.
io
ns ke
19.5 f 12 PC: contactor pole.
44.5 25
187
112
f8
f 16
PR: rupturing pole 500 A
25
77
25
80
(6x)
155
with overlapping.
PR 1000 PR 500
25 50 50
SE: separator.
rs
200
voltage V
M N M N (e
� 220 150 200 120 160
> 220 200 240 150 200 CE xci
ta
54
48
tio
69
150
63
X
f 12
Protrusion A1
f 12
33 60.5
Number of Number of M n
delayed blocks type blocks(1)
2 75 mm
9
0
0 3 125 mm
200
0 4 125mm
145
0 5 190 mm
25 44.5
f 16
(6x) 0 6 190 mm
1 1 86 mm
25 50 50 1 2 125 mm
1 3 125 mm
1 4 190 mm
1 5 190 mm
47
SE SE
.
PF PC PC PF PC PF C
5 5 150 E
PR
44.5 25
AM
Ø16 X
(6x)
155
25 50 50
9
200
8
25
60
-
32 O Field
CM2D CM2D 150
00 ve
ra
ll cir
14
200
30
cu
120
18 18
145
di
25 44.5
203.5 912,5 Ø16
(6x)
it
80 100 90 165 159 116 80 116 139 155 90 100 A1
25 50 50 m
630 600
e br
94

315
ns ea
electrical release.
CM2D: magnetic circuit. io
PC: contactor pole.
ns ke
M
200
10 PR: rupturing pole 500 A
145
with overlapping.
Ø16
100
25 44.5
SE: separator. (8x) rs
200
34
155
N 50 50 50 32.5
voltage V
475
PC M N M N (e
� 220 150 200 120 160
CE xci
25 25
25 15
> 220 200 240 150 200 19.5
80
Ø12
ta
187
112
Ø8
25
77
25
80
50 Protrusion A1 PR 1000 PR 500
tio
X
200
AF
Ø13 Number of Number of M n
171
(6x)
0 2 75 mm
0
0
3
4
125 mm
125mm
9
54
25
48
69
63
25
0 5 190 mm Ø12
Ø12
PF 0 6 190 mm 33 60.5
145
1 1 86 mm
342 86 1 2 125 mm
436
2
1 3 125 mm
10 1 4 190 mm
1 5 190 mm
SE SE SE SE 48
.
PF PC PC PF PC PC PF C
5
PR PR
5 E
AM X
9
8
25
60
-
32 O Field
ve
CM2D CM2D
00
ra
ll cir
14
30
cu
120
18 18
203.5 1155
4 di
it
80 100 90 165 155 139 116 80 116 139 155 90 165 100 A1 m
e br
765 765
95

AM: mechanical latching with 15 ns ea
electrical release.
io
Ø12
112
PC: contactor pole.
ns ke
77
M PF: attachment plane. PR
10 PR: rupturing pole 500 A
with overlapping.
SE: separator. rs
200
34
155
N
voltage V
475
PC
M N M N (e
� 220 150 200 120 160
CE xci
54
69
25 25
Ø12 > 220 200 240 150 200

ta
80
60.5
tio
X
50 Protrusion A1
n
200
AF Number of Number of M
Ø13 150
(6x)
315 delayed blocks type blocks(1)
171
2 75 mm
9
0
44.5 25
Ø16
0 3 125 mm
(6x) 0 4 125mm
25
155
25 50 50 0 5 190 mm
200
200
PF
25
0 6 190 mm
145
1 86 mm
145
1
100
25 44.5
Ø16
342 86 (8x) 1 2 125 mm
436 1 3 125 mm
2
50 50 50 32.5 1 4 190 mm
10
1 5 190 mm
4
9.
C
PC
M 25 50 50 50 50 AM E
10
10
PR X
44.5 25
9
Ø16
256
34
200
(10x)
N
155
PF PF
PC 8
5
0
0
0 O Field
ve
200
ra
AF
ll cir
CM2D
cu
25
14
di
Ø16
120
PF 100 (10x)
18 18
145 it
25 44.5
25 50 50 50 50 25
m
342
2
C 65 74 110 90 90 135 116 A1

e br
96
615
ns ea
250 io
Distance C
ns ke
44.5 25
25 15
19.5 Ø12
Ø16 Rating 5000 mm 10
112
187
(10x)
rs
155
77
25
80
25
PR 500 25 50 50 50 50
200
PR 1000

voltage V
M N M N (e
� 220 150 200 120 160
> 220 200 240 150 200 CE xci
ta
54
48
69
250
63
tio
X
Ø12 Ø12 Protrusion A1
33 60.5
2 75 mm
9
0
0 3 125 mm
200
0 4 125mm
145
AF: attachment axis. Ø16 0 5 190 mm

25 44.5

(10x) 0 6 190 mm
CM2D: magnetic circuit. 25 50 50 50 50 25 1 2 125 mm
PC: contactor pole. 1 3 125 mm
1 4 190 mm
with overlapping. 1 5 190 mm
50
.
SE
C
E
PC PC
M 10 AM
X
10
PR
256
200
34
PF
PF
155
N
475
PC
50
25 25
00
80
O Field
ve
50
200
1. ra
AF
ll cir
f 13 CM2D
(6x)
171
cu
25
14
di
25
120
PF 18 18
145
it
m
342 86
436
2
C 65 74 110 90 90 165 175 116 A1
e br
97
ns ea
25 15 820
19.5 f 12
112
187
io
f8
250
77
25
80
25
PR 1000 PR 500 25 50 50 50 50
Distance C D E ns ke
44,5 25
Calibre 5000 mm 10 405 30,3
Calibre 5500 mm 10 425 40,3
rs
155
Ø 16
54
48
69

63
f 12 f 12
voltage V
33 60.5 M N M N (e
� 220 150 200 120 160
> 220 200 240 150 200 CE xci
ta
electrical release.
tio
X
CM2D: magnetic circuit. Protrusion A1
PC: contactor pole. Number of Number of M n
PF: attachment plane. delayed blocks type blocks(1)
2 75 mm
9
0
with overlapping. Ø 16
SE: separator. 0 3 125 mm
0 4 125mm
145
0 5 190 mm
44,5
0 6 190 mm
1 86 mm
25
1
E 49,2 49,2 49,2 49,2 49,2 49,2 49,2 E 1 2 125 mm
D
1 3 125 mm
1 4 190 mm
1 5 190 mm
SE SE
5
1.
PF PC PF PC
PF
C
10
PR PR
10 250
E
44.5 25
X
AM Ø16
(10x)
155
25 50 50 50 50
200
9
8
CM2 D CM2D 250
O Field
ve
ra
14
200
30
ll cir
120
18
145
18
25 44.5
90 1090 Ø16
(10x)
80 100 90 90 155 144 116 80 116 144 155 90 90 100 A1 25 50 50 50 50 25
695 695
cu
di
it
m
e br
98
ns ea
io
M
10 15
Distance C
Rating 5000 mm 10
ns ke
rs
112
200
77
34
155
PR
N Insulating distance (safety perimeter)
475

PC voltage V
M N M N (e
� 220 150 200 120 160
> 220 200 240 150 200 CE xci
ta
200
AF
54
tio
69
X
Ø12 Protrusion A1
60.5 Number of Number of M n
25
2 75 mm
9
0
PF 0 3 125 mm
145
342 AF: attachment axis. 0 4 125mm

436 AM: mechanical latching with 0 5 190 mm
2 electrical release. 0 6 190 mm
C
CM2D: magnetic circuit. 1 1 86 mm
PF: attachment plane. 1 3 125 mm
with overlapping. 1 4 190 mm
SE: separator. 1 5 190 mm
SE SE 52.
PF
PC PF
C
PF
10 10
PR
E
AM
X
9
8
50
00
CM2 D CM2D

O Field
ve
ra
14
electrical release.
ll cir
120
CM2D: magnetic circuit. 18 18
PC: contactor pole. 90 960
30
with overlapping. 80 100 90 90 155 144 116 80 116 159 90 90 165 100 A1
SE: separator. 695 720
cu
di
it
M
250
m
e br
10
44.5 25
99
Ø16
(10x)
ns ea
200
34
155
155
N 25 50 50 50 50
io
475
200
PC
25 25
80
50
Distance
Calibre 5000 mm 10
C
405
D
30,3
E
ns ke
200
Ø13
AF 250 Calibre 5500 mm 10 425 40,3
rs
171
(6x)

25
200
25 voltage V
M N M N (e
145
PF
145
� 220 150 200 120 160

25 44.5
Ø16
CE xci
(10x)
342 86
> 220 200 240 150 200
ta
436
2 25 50 50 50 50 25
C
tio
X
25 15
Protrusion A1
19.5 Ø12 Number of Number of M n
112

187
Ø8
2 75 mm
9
77
0
25
80
25
3 125 mm
PR 1000 PR 500
Ø 16 0
200
0 4 125mm
145
0 5 190 mm
44.5
0 6 190 mm
49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 1 1 86 mm
E
1 2 125 mm
25
D
1 3 125 mm
54
48
69
4 190 mm
63
Ø12 Ø12 1
33 60.5 1 5 190 mm
53.
SE SE SE SE
C
PF PC PC PF PC PC
E
PF
10 10
PR PR
AM X
9
8
50
00
CM2 D C M2D
O Field
ve
14
ra
30
120
18 18
1245 ll cir
80 100 90 90 165 155 139 116 80 116 139 155 90 90 165 100 A1
855 855
cu
di
it
25
m
250
M
Ø16
44.5
10 (10x)
e br
155
100
25 50 50 50 50
ns ea
200
200
34
155
io
475
PC
25 25
80
50
Distance
Calibre 5000 mm 10
C
405
D
30,3
E
ns ke
200
Ø13 AF
Calibre 5500 mm 10 425 40,3
171
(6x)
200
Ø 16 rs
145

25
44.5 metallic walls insulated walls

25
PF
voltage V
145
342 86 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2

E
M N M N (e
� 220 150 200 120 160
25
436
CE xci
D
2 > 220 200 240 150 200
C ta
tio
X
Protrusion A1
15 delayed blocks type blocks(1)
Ø12
2 75 mm
9
0
112
0 3 125 mm
77
PR
AF: attachment axis. 0 4 125mm
AM: mechanical latching with 0 5 190 mm
CM2D: magnetic circuit. 1 1 86 mm
PF: attachment plane. 1 3 125 mm
54
69
Ø12 with overlapping. 1 4 190 mm

60.5 SE: separator. 1 5 190 mm
Excitation contactors from 1250 to 5500 A
DRAW-OUT VERSION
54. DRAW-OUT EXCITATION CONTACTORS
Draw-out version provided

for generation 71 from 1250 to 2000 and for generation 98 from 2560 to 5500 A
CEX 71 1250 to 2000 2. 1 in draw-out version
101
DC Poles
CMA 06 1250,
CMA 06 1600,
CMA 06 2000,
CMA 06 2560
CMA 06 3000
CMA 06 5000
CMA 06 5500.
AC Poles,
consul t us
Purpose Options
Ensuring the division into sections of a track portion by ■ Motorization of the stretching of the spring.
opening a bi-stable motorised energy-storing contactor
on DC distribution circuits, line tracks for trolley buses, ■ Mechanical locking in opened position by a RONIS,
tramways, protection coupons for metros, and so on,... TRAYVOU, PROFALUX, etc., type lock
Lifting and handling: insulation of a travelling crane sup- Equipment locked in opened position:
plied with DC current,... - Key isfree,
- No electrical control allowed.
CMA front cover
■ Padlocking system (padlock not provided).
■ Mechanical signalling light gives the position of the con-
tactor (opened/closed). ■ Locking of the Local/Remote control by a RONIS,
TRAYVOU, PROFALUX, etc. type lock and shutter
■ Mechanical light signals the status of the spring. preventing the access to the local push button.
- Manual control locked: key is free.
■ Lever for stretching the spring for manual control. - Manual control freed: Key is trapped,
No electrical control allowed.
■ Mechanical push-buttons (closing and opening).
■ Opening of the contactor by a “ lacking voltage” coil.
This one provokes the opening of the contactor when
the supplied voltage is reduced to 35% to 70% of its
nominal value.
■ Instant action, or delayed on request.
■ Draw-out energy-storing control.
■ Possible combination of poles of different ratings on the

same contactor.
■ Possible placement in panels:

- metallic,
- in polyester .
* number of keys provided: 2
102
Shunt contactor
and protect ion coupon
Energy-storing
control with abrupt
closing, independent
from the operating
speed of the operator
103
Energy-storing control with abrupt closing,
independent from the operating speed of the operator
Manual version only

These contactors have a control lever to stretch the Opening
energy-storing spring and an anti-pumping device.
When the energy is stored by the spring, there are two Since the contactor is closed, only a local action on the
possibilities for closing the contactor. opening push-button is sufficient to open the contactor.
This one opens under the pressure of the contacts and
Closing by push-button return springs.
Once the energy is accumulated by the spring, a local Automatic closing

action on the push-button is sufficient to close the con-
tactor. Once the energy is accumulated by the spring, the con-
This one closes and remains mechanically latched. Should tactor closes. In this specific case, the system won’t pro-
you wish so, the spring can be re-stretched after that vide any local push-button. Moreover, there won’t be any
closing which allows successively and without bringing possibility to stretch again the spring in order to make, as
any energy: in the previous case:
- to open, - to open,
- to close, - to close,
- and to open again the contactor. - an opening.
As for the opening, this one remains unchanged
(by a local push-button).
Manual and electri cal version

Adapting an electrical control device on a manual control Opening by PB and EA
equipment is easy since the needed space is already inte-
grated into the CMA dimensions. (However, this adapta- Remote opening by a voltage-triggered releaser EA.
tion has to be done in our workshops.) Local opening with the opening push-button located on
the board panel.
The energy-storage of the spring is achieved by the
adjunction of a universal motor and of a reducer device Automatic closing
with gearing with mechanical anti-pumping system, in
case of maintained order. As soon as the energy is stored by the spring, the contac-
Once the energy is stored by the spring there are 2 possi- tor closes. In this specific case, the system will provide
bilities to close the contactor. neither a local closing push-button nor a closing electro-
magnet EE(the supply of the motor is switched-off by a
Closing by PB and Closing Electromagnet EE limit switch) and there is no possibility to stretch again
the spring in order to make, as in the previous case:
Remote closing with a closing electromagnet with cur- - an opening,
rent emission. - a closing,
Local closing with the closing push button located on the - an opening.
panel board. As for the opening, this one remains unchanged (by a
local push-button or by the opening electromagnet).
The spring is again automatically stretched after the clos-
ingof the CMA which allows successively and without
bringing any energy:
- to open,
- to close,
- to open again the contactor.
Optical signalling of the board panel

Status of the spring:
- Yellow: not stretched,
- Blue: stretched (energy is stored).
Position indicator of the CMA:

- Red: closed,
- Green: opened.
104
Energy-storing control with abrupt closing,
independent from the operating speed of the operator
Options
Motorization of the stretching of the energy- Remote release mechanism
storing spring
Two types of release mechanisms allow the remote open-
Padlocking of the CMA in opened position ing of the CMA.
- A release mechanism in case of current emissionEA
- by a RONIS, PROFALUX,...type lock and with the provokes the instant opening of the CMA.
adder of auxiliary contacts (1NO + 1NC). - A release mechanism at minimum voltage MV or
- by a padlock (not supplied). MVR provokes the opening of the CMA when its sup-
plied voltage decreases to a value between 35 and
Condemnation of the PB of the board panel 70% of its nominal value.
- by a shutter that can be padlocked MV : instant action.

(padlock not supplied). MVR : delayed action of 250 ms or 0.6 s
- by a RONIS, PROFALUX,... type lock with auxiliary con- (AC supply).
tacts (1 NO + 1 NC) in order to inhibit the remote
orders and shutter preventing the access to the PB. Other delaying devices on request.
Stopped closing FE Draw-out control
Only for “ manual control ” or “electrical without auto- (Manual or electrical) draw-out energy-storing control.
matic closing “ versions of CMA.
Operating voltage from 0.35 to 0.85 Un.
Board panel functions
1 LOCAL/REMOTE lock (locking of the local controls: free key)

related contacts: 1NO+1NC
2 Cover prohibiting use of the push-buttons (padlock and/or lock)
related contacts: 1NO+1NC
3 Control handle for stretching the energy-storing spring
4 Lock for locking the contactor in OPEN position (free key: equipment lock)
5 Spring position indicator:
yellow = not stretched spring
blue = stretched spring
6 Connecting block (information on the position contacts)
7 Push-button for local opening
8 Push-button for local closing
9 Padlocking facility in OPEN position
10 Status indication of the equipment
green = equipment OPEN
red = equipment CLOSED
11 Sectioning plug for the accumulation control block
12 Lever for inhibiting the lacking voltage coil (MV or MVR) in manual mode
13 Front plastron
14 ID label (reference to be mentioned in any correspondence)
Power circuit
Particularities for currents greater than 2000 A, the At the time of the opening , the thermal poles open
power circuit is made of 2 separated parts assembled on before the blow-out poles and the break is ensured by
the same axis and linked to a same mechanism. these magnetic blow-out poles.
■ A “ thermal” part: All the contacts are in copper with special silver pad for
Composed of blow-out poles mounted in parallel on a currents from 1250 to 6000 A.
single section where the nominal current passes.
■ A “break” part: ■ Possibility to have opening poles without overlapping.
Composed of magnetic blow-out poles and blow-out
cages with metallic plates.
105
Control circuit of the energy-storing motorised contactor
Drawing representing all the possible optio ns for non-draw-out versions in AC current
BC AE Draw-out energy accumulation

BC EA control block
M Motor
13 SD 1
EE Closing electromagnet
EA Opening electromagnet
14 2
FE Stopped closing
delaying system MV MV Release mechanism at minimum
voltage
MVR Lacking voltage delayed coil
15 SM 3 MI Inhibi tion pull MV or MVR in
manual mode
16 4 C22 Spring stretching contact
SM Lock Local/Remote
SD Lock for padlocking in opened
5
IT position
17
6 D1.1 to D2.2 Auto-switching contacts
18 D1.3 to D2.8 Free auxiliary contacts
19 BP EL Local closing push butt on
7
8 20 BP DE Local opening push butt on
C22 AM Manuel stretching
MVR MI R Energy storing spring
IT Signalling contact inhibi tion
20 8 pull MV
MV
21 9
FE
BP DE
22 10
EA
BP EL DRAW-OUT PART
23 11
EE
AM
24 12
M
1 FCA
R
26 D 2.2 D 2.1 25
28 D 1.2 D 1.1 27
30 D 2.8 D 2.7 29
32 D 1.8 D 1.7 31
FIXED PART
34 D 2.6 D 2.5 33
36 D 1.6 D 1.5 35
38 D 2.4 D 2.3 37
40 D 1.4 D 1.3 39
106
Examples of simplified applications
“HEAVY” Metro
C CBC or CBFC type contactor

SN CMA - N type sectioning device
CP CMA type shun t contactor Sub-station
(1 x 6000 A and 1 x 1600 A)
SN SN
CP
CP
M
M
Track 1
Track 2
CP
M
M
CP
SN
Tramway
CP CMA type shun t contactor

CPI CMA type shun t contactor
SN CMA - N type manual sectioning device
Sub-station Sub-station
CP CP
M M
SN SN SN SN SN SN SN SN
CPI
107
Characteristics of CMA 06 1250 to 2000 A
Energy-storing motorised contactor
Ue : 750 and upto 1200 V Ü
Power Circuit CMA Type 06
1250 1600 2000
Thermal nominal current (1) DC_1 A 1250 1600 2000
Nominal voltage of use Vcc 1000 1000 1000
Duty voltage Vcc 750 750 750
5s kA 20 15 30
10 s kA 13 11 21
15 s kA 11 8 17
30 s kA 8 6 12
1 min kA 5 4 8
3 min kA 3 3 5
10 min kA 2 2,2 3
Unipolar current voltage V 900 900 900
switch-off rating 5 ms kA 10 10 10
Bipolar current voltage V 500 700 1000 1500 500 700 1000 1500 500 700 1000 1500
switch-off rating(5) L/R=15 ms kA 30 23 18 6.6 30 23 18 6.6 30 23 18 6.6
L/R=20 ms kA 18 18 18
Tetrapolar current voltage V 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
switch-off rating(6) L/R=15 ms kA 30 19 5 30 19 5 30 19 5
Current switch-on rating L/R= 5 ms kA 40 40 40
Dielectric voltage 8 kV - 50 Hz - 1 mn 8 kV - 50 Hz - 1 mn 8 kV - 50 Hz - 1 mn
Control circuit
Nominal voltages AC 50 - 60 Hz V 48 - 127 - 220/230 - 380(3)
DC V 24 - 48 - 110 - 220 (3)
Power absorbed by the motor
AC VA 175 175 175
DC W 150 150 150
Closing electromagnet
AC inrush VA 320 320 320
duty VA 50 50 50
DC inrush W 300 300 300
duty W 50 50 50
Opening electromagnet
AC50-60Hz inrush VA 100 100 100
DC inrush � 220 V W 30 30 30
500 V W 275 275 275
Electrical insulation/earth 2.5 kV - 50 Hz - 1 mn 2.5 kV - 50 Hz - 1 mn 2.5 kV - 50 Hz - 1 mn
Stopped closing FE
Operating voltage V from 0.35 to 0.85 Un
Assigned voltages AC 50 Hz V 24 - 48 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 415 - 500(3)
AC 60 Hz V 24 - 48 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 415 - 500(3)
DC V 24 - 48 - 110 - 120 - 220 - 440 - 500(3)
Consumption
duty VA 10 10 10
DC ± 220 V W 6 6 6
440 - 550 V W 21 21 21
500 V W 21 21 21
Release mechanism at minimum voltage

Assigned voltages Un
AC 50 Hz V 24 - 48 - 110/127 - 220 - 380 - 415 - 500(3)
AC 60 Hz V 24 - 48 - 110/127 - 220 - 380(3)
DC V 24 - 48 - 110 - 120 - 220 - 440 - 500 (3)
Operating voltage from 0.35 to 0.7 Un(2)
Absorbed power
duty VA 10 10 10
DC inrush � 220 V W 6 6 6
440 - 500 V W 21 21 21
Average time of operation

Closing time of the contactor (4) at Un ms 50 50 50
Opening time of the contactor at Un ms 50 50 50
Auxiliary contacts 3 NO + 3 NC
Thermal current ith A 20 20 20
ACcos <p = 0.3 / 500 V A 6 6 6
DC 110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
L/R� 0.01s 250 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8
108
Characteristics of CMA 06 2560 to 5500 A
Energy-storing motorised contactor
Ue : 750 and upto 1200 V Ü
Power circuit CMA Type 06
2560 ( * ) 3200 ( * ) 5000 (7) (*)
Thermal nominal current (1) DC_1 A 2560 3200 5000
Nominal voltage of use Vcc 1000 1000 1000
Duty voltage Vcc 750 750 750
5s kA 24 48 68
10 s kA 18 34 47
15 s kA 15 27 38
30 s kA 10 19 27
1 min kA 8 14 19
3 min kA 5 8 12
10 min kA 4 5 7
Bipolar current switch-off voltage V 500 700 1000 1500 500 700 1000 1500 500 700 1000 1500
rating(5) L/R=15 ms kA 30 23 18 6.6 30 23 18 6.6 30 23 18 6.6
L/R=20 ms kA 18 18 18
Tetrapolar current voltage V 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
switch-off rating(6) L/R=15 ms kA 30 19 5 30 19 5 30 19 5
Current switch-on rating L/R= 5 ms kA 60 60 100
Dielectric voltage 8 kV - 50 Hz - 1 mn 8 kV - 50 Hz - 1 mn 8 kV - 50 Hz - 1 mn
Control circuit
Nominal voltages AC 50 - 60 Hz V 48 - 127 - 220/230 - 380(3)
DC V 24 - 48 - 110 - 220 (3)
Power absorbed by the motor
AC VA 175 175 175
DC W 150 150 150
Closing electromagnet
duty VA 50 50 50
DC inrush W 300 300 300
duty W 50 50 50
Opening electromagnet
AC50-60Hz inrush VA 100 100 100
DC inrush� 220 V W 30 30 30
500 V W 275 275 275
Stopped closing FE
Operating voltage V from 0.35 to 0.85 Un
Assigned voltages AC 50 Hz V 24 - 48 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 415 - 500(3)
AC 60 Hz V 24 - 48 - 127 - 220 - 380 - 415 - 500(3)
DC V 24 - 48 - 110 - 120 - 220 - 440 - 500(3)
Consumption
duty VA 10 10 10
DC ± 220 V W6 6 6
440 - 550 V W 21 21 21
500 V W 21 21 21
Release mechanism at minimum voltage

Assigned voltages Un
AC 50 Hz V 24 - 48 - 110/127 - 220 - 380 - 415 - 500(3)
AC 60 Hz V 24 - 48 - 110/127 - 220 - 380(3)
DC V 24 - 48 - 110 - 120 - 220 - 440 - 500 (3)
Operating voltage from 0.35 to 0.7 Un(2)
Absorbed power
duty VA 10 10 10
DC inrush � 220 V W6 6 6
440 - 500 V W 21 21 21
Average time of operation

Closing time of the contactor (4) at Un ms 50 50 50
Opening time of the contactor at Un ms 50 50 50
Auxiliary contacts 3 NO + 3 NC
Thermal current ith A 20 20 20
ACcos <p = 0.3 / 500 V A6 6 6
DC 110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
L/R� 0.01s 250 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8
(1) in open air. (6) 4 blow-out poles (2 on the positive line and 2 on the negative line). •Temperature factor to be applied to the poles or to the current
(2) closing of the contactor is ensured from 0.85 Un. (7) 5500 A; lower section C = 15 mm.. controlled according to the ambient temperature (around the
(3) for other voltages, consult us. contactor):
(4) opening time is measured from the supply of the closing coil until * Association of thermal poles and magnetic blow-out poles.
the separation of the main contacts. 1.04 40 < t < 45°C
(5) 2 blow-out poles.
1.08 45 < t � 50°C
1.12 50 < t � 55°C
1.19 55 < t � 60°C
109
54. CMA 06 1250 - 1600 - 2000 3.0
M
228
PF
AP
B VF
200 PF
VP 10
AF 25 = =
N 25
25 80 10
25
25 200 60
= =
25
Overall dimensions CMA 06 1250 to 5500 A

250
Ø 13
125 17.5 125
344 25
15
25
150
10
PF 60 25
45 114 A 110 110 74 60
304
25
200
110
393 20
Upper connecting
sections
143 160
■ CMA 1250
Ø 13
160 90 344
25 50
12.5
25 12.5
50
■ CMA 1600 - 2000

12.5
25
25
80
AF : attachment axis Isulating distance 25
AP : pole axis (safety perimeter) Distance A
PF : attachment plane 15
VF : attachment screw M N Standard 21
VP : see connecting sections Insulated walls 120 120 Reduced 226 50
B : connecting box
55. CMA 06 1250 - 1600 - 2000 2.0
M
228 228
PF PF
AP VF
B B
200 PF PF
VP 10
AF = =25 25
N 2580
25 10
25
25 200 60
= =

25 25
250 250
Ø 13
17.5
125 125 25
344 15 25
25 25
150 150
10
PF 60 25 25
45 114 A 165 90 60 45 114 A 165 90 60

111
304
25
200
393 20
143 160
160 90 344
Upper connecting sections

■ CMA 1250Ø 13 ■ CMA 1600 - 2000
12.5
25
AF : attachment axis 25
Isulating distance 25 50
AP : pole axis 80
(safety perimeter) Distance A
PF : attachment plane 12.5 25
25 12.5
VP : see connecting sections Insulated walls 120 120 Reduced 226 50 15
B : connecting box
50
56. CMA 06 1250 - 1600 - 2000 6.0
PF
A A
M
228
VF AP
B
200 PF PF
VP 10
AF 25 = =
N 25 80
25 10
25
25 200 60
= =

25 25
250
Ø 13
125 17.5 125
344 25
15
25
150
10
PF 60 25
125 165 165 165 165 90 35

112
Upper connecting
334 sections
25
200 ■ CMA 1250
Ø 13
393 20
143 160 25 50
12.5
25 12.5
50
160 90 374
■ CMA 1600 - 2000

12.5
25
25
Isulating distance
AP : pole axis (safety perimeter) Distance A 25
PF : attachment plane
15
VP : see connecting sections Insulated walls 120 120 Reduced 226
B : connecting box 50
57. CMA 06 1250 - 1600 - 2000 3.0
M
228
VF AP
B
200 PF PF
VP 10
AF 25 = =
N 25 80
25 10
25
25 200 60
= =

25 25
250
Ø 13
125 17.5 125
344 25 15
25
150
10
PF 25 60
125 165 A A 165 165 165 90 35
PF
113
Upper connecting
334 sections
25
200 ■ CMA 1250
Ø 13
393 20
143 160 25 50
12.5
25 12.5
160 90 374 50
■ CMA 1600 - 2000

12.5
25
25
80
Isulating distance
AP : pole axis (safety perimeter) Distance A
PF : attachment plane 15
VP : see connecting sections Insulated walls 120 120 Reduced 276
50
B : connecting box
58. CMA 06 2560 2.0 - 3200 2.0
M 27 10 150
228 5 25 50 50
PF
B VF
44.5
25
200 PF
155
AF 25
Ø 16
N
10
25
200

25
250
Ø 16
145
344
44.5
150
10 5 25
25
50 50
PF
150
45 114 A 90 B 90 74 60
114
304
25
200
393 20
143 160
160 90 344
Isulating distance
(safety perimeter) Distance A Distance B
AF : att achment axis
PF : att achment plane M N Standard 316 Withou t separat or 110
VF : att achment screw Insulated walls 120 120 Reduced 226 With separat or 165
B : connecting box
59. CMA 06 2560 - 3000 1.0
M 27 10 150
5
25
228 25 50 50
PF
B VF
44.5
200 PF
155
25 25
AF Ø 16
N 25 80
25 10
25
200

AF 25
250
145
344
Ø 16
44.5
150
10
PF 2.5
32.5
25
50 50 50
45 114 A 90 165 90 60 315
115
304
25
200
393 20
143 160
160 90 344
Isulating distance
PF : att achment plane M N Standard 316
VF : att achment screw Insulated walls 120 120 Reduced 226
B : connecting box
60. CMA 06 2560 - 3000 2.0
M 27 10 150
25
228 5 25 50 50
B VF
44.5
200 PF PF
155
25 25
AF Ø 16
N 25
25 80 10
25
200

AF 25
250
145
344
Ø 16
44.5
150
10
PF 2.5 32.5
25
50 50 50
90 315
25 121 90 165 A A 90 165 90 60
PF
116
334
25
200
393 20
143 160
160 90 374
Isulating distance
PF : att achment plane M N Standard 316
VF : att achment screw Insulated walls 120 120 Reduced 226
B : connecting box
61. CMA 06 5000 - 5500 1.0
M 27 10 250
25
228 25 50 50 50 50
PF
B VF
44.5
200 PF
155
25 25
AF Ø 16
N 25
25 80 10
25
200

AF 25
250
Ø 16
145
344
44.5
150
C
PF 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2
25
30.3
45 114 A 90 90 165 90 60 405
117
304
25
200
393 20
143 160
160 90 344
Isulating distance
(safety perimeter) Distance A Distance C
PF : att achment plane M N Standard 316 Calibr e 5000 10
VF : att achment screw Insulated walls 120 120 Reduced 226 Calibr e 5500 15
B : connecting box
62. CMA 06 5000 - 5500 2.0
M 27 10
228
B VF
200 PF PF
25 25
AF
N 25
25 80 10
25
200

AF 25
250
344
150
C
PF
60 90 90 90 165 A A 90 90 165 90 60
PF
118
250
25
25 50 50 50 50
44.5
155
Ø 16
Ø 16
145
44.5
49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2
25
30.3
405
Isulating distance
PF : att achment plane
VF : att achment screw
B : connecting box
M 27 10
228
334
25
200
393 20
143 160
160 90 374
M N Standard 366 Calibr e 5000 10

Insulated walls 120 120 Reduced 276 Calibr e 5500 15
Isulating distance
PF : att achment plane
VF : att achment screw
B : connecting box
63. CMA 06 5000(1) + 2 x 1250(2)
M 27 10
228
B VF
200 PF PF
25 VP
AF 25
25
N
2580
25 10
200
AF 25
250
17.5
344 15 25
25

150
C 60 25
PF
60 90 165 165 165 A A 90 90 165 90 60
250
25 50 50 50 50
25
334
25
200
44.5
155
393 20 Ø 16
119
143 160
160 90 374
Ø 16 30.3
Upper connecting sections of auxiliary poles
145
■ 1250 ■ 1600 - 2000
44.5
12.5 M
25
49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2 49.2
Ø 13
25
AP 405
25 200
VP 10
80
AF = =
25 50 25
N 2580
12.5 15 25 Distance A
25 12.5 25 60
Standard 366
200
50 50
= = Reduced 276
AF : attachment axis
Isulating distance
AP : pole axis (safety perimeter) Distance C
PF : attachment plane Ø 13
VF : attachment screw M N 125 125 Calibre 5000 10
342
VP : see connecting sections Insulated walls 120 120 PF Calibr e 5500 15
B : connecting box
(1) 5500 possible.

(2) 1600 or 2000 possible.
Vertical mechanical locking
80 to 200 A range
- CBA 55,
- CBPA 57,
- CBFC 55,
- CBC 57B 80 - 150 - 200.
Horizontal or «vis-à-vis» mechanical locking available on request.
closing direction
contactor
closed
Contactors'
attachment
plane
(1)
H = 250 mm
closing direction
contactor
open
400 to 1000 A range

- CBA 75,
- CBFC 75 400 - 500 - 630 - 800 - 1000.
Locking on the hold generaytion moving shaft or for Standard locking at the end of the moving shaft.
1250 to 5000 A range.
closing direction closing direction
contactor
contactor closed
closed
Contactors'
attachment
plane
Contactors'
attachment
plane
(1)
H
(1)
H
closing direction
closing direction
contactor
open
contactor
open
Calibre (A) H (mm)

400 400
500 400
630 400
800 575 (1)for other lenght, consult us
Horizontal or «vis à vis» mechanical locking available and request.
1000 575
120
Vertical mechanical locking
1250 to 5000 A range

- CBA 75, CBFC75
- CBA - CBC 71 1250 - 1600 - 2000.
Horizontal or «vis à vis» mechanical locking available on request.
- CBA - CBC 98 2560 à 5000.
closing direction
contactor
closed
Contactors'
attachment
plane
(1)
H = 625 mm
closing direction
contactor
open
2500 to 5000 A range

- CBA 54 2500, - CBA 60 4000,
- CBC 54 3000, - CBC 60 5000.
closing direction
contactor
closed
Contactors'
attachment
plane
(1)
H = 700 mm
closing direction
contactor
open
(1) for other lenght, consult us.

Horizontal or «vis à vis» mechanical locking available on request.
121
CBT rapid contactors
CBT 200,
CBT 400,
CBT 800.
CBT 75 400
manual control
General
The equipment composed of the fast opening system For rectifier bridges that:
DS1 + rapid opening contactor CBT may be used for ■ are to operate on networks subject to frequent voltage
other applications than the ones described in the present disruptions or,
chapter. However, the general rules of application remain ■ have to ensure significant duty factors as UPSunits.
the same. The probability of defect is high enough to make it inter-
We know that some commanded rectifier bridges, of «all esting to foresee an additional selective protection, capa-
thyristor» type may restore the energy to the network by ble of opening the connection between the load and the
operating as UPSunits. This is the case for example of a bridge before the energy created in the fuses generates
GRAETZ bridge connected to a driving load motor. their fusion or partial degradation.
This type of operation is also found in case of motors con- All the more so, the thyristors are also protected by this
nected to rectifier bridges (constituted of two GRAETZ protective system.
bridges assembled opposite) capable of ensuring the This last one should include:
operation during the four quadrants of the «speed - a rapid switch off device - the «rapid CBT contactor»
torque» diagram. and,
During the UPSoperation, if the network voltage sud- - a CBT contactor instant control device in case the cur-
denly abnormally drops, the electromotive force of the rent would exceed a pre-fixed value - the fast opening
load is no more opposed to the one of the network. system DS1.
Moreover, as the control pulses of the thyristors‘ UPS Those elements and eventually the outer circuit must be
bridge generally, go on energizing then, this short-circuit scheduled and adjusted so that at the end of the cut off,
closes very fast directly in one or several vertical branches the energy dissipated in the fuses and thyristors shouldn‘t
of the bridge. cause any damage.
Ultra-rapid fuses, playing their normal part of protection We know that for the fuses, this limit is defined by the
melt in more or lesssignificant number. If there are no 2
fuses in the branches of the bridges, the thyristors will be manufacturers by the integral ∫i dt of pre-arc.
the ones, by being put off load, to stop the output of the 2
load on that short-circuit, but only after the current had Same thing for the thyristors, an integral ∫i dt of fusion,
reached high ratings. not to reach or exceed, has to be defined
122
Technical featuresCBT 200 to 800 A
41. CBT 200 - 400 - 800

Use Description
Such a contactor is used to complete the protection of ■ 1 or 2 magnetic arc-blowout closing poles.
thyristors bridges supplying the DC motors in case of dis- ■ Closing
appearance of the AC supply voltage. Coupled with an - CBT200: electrical closing thanks to a solid magnetic
electronic current detector, the CBTcontactor opens fast circuit controlled by an auxiliary contactor,
enough to: - CBT400 and 800: manual closing with handle or electri-
■ avoid the fusion of the ultra-rapid fuses. cal closing with a separated laminated magnetic circuit
■ limit the current to a value inferior to the one that would controlled by an auxiliary contactor or manual & electri-
create a clash
2 to the motor’s commutator. cal closing.
■ limit the∫i dt value to a doorstep very inferior to the ■ Mechanical latching with electrical release on CBT 200
present possibilities of thyristors. (manual release on request), mechanical latching with
electrical and manual releases on CBT400 and 800 A.
■ Instant M type auxiliary contacts (the contacts for switch-
CBT 400 Manual closing
ing-off the closing and tripping coils are mounted and
cabled).
Freeauxiliary contacts: 1 NO + 1 NC on CBT200 and CBT
400 & 800 with electrical control, 1 NO + 2 NC on CBT
400 & 800 with manual control.
■ Possible addition of 1 or 2 extra M3 blocks, (increases the
overall dimensions of the CBT).
Contactors with manual control are equipped with:
- asafety contact (opened during the operation of the
handle),
- a padlocking facility, on request.
Technical features
CBT 200 CBT 400 CBT 800
Insulating voltage V 1000 1000 1000
Nominal DCvoltage
single-pole break V 250 300 300
two-pole break V 500 600 600
Current of use A 300 500 1000
minimum section to connect mm2 185 240 500
Current switch-off rating L/R= 15 ms, U re-established-550 Vcontinuous A 4000 8000 16000
Arcing voltage V 1200 1900 1900
Time of rise of arcing voltage (7 ms < L/R < 37 ms) ms <5 <5 <5
Arcing time (L/R= 15 ms) ms 14 14 14
Control circuit
standard voltages V 110 - 200 110 - 127 - 220 - 380 110 - 127 - 220 - 380
closing (direct or
rectified current(2)) absorbed power W 660 2300 2300
closing time at Un ms 95 80 80
opening(3) current A 27 27 27
quantity of electricity coulomb 0.1 0.1 0.1
allowable permanent current A 1.1 1.1 1.1
pulse time ms 18 18 18
Opening time between command and separation of contacts ms 8-9 8-9 8-9
Mechanical endurance operations 75000 15000 15000
Use connection(1)
1 contactor 2 contactors
Current Voltage 1P 2Pin 2Pin 2Pin
of use of use series parallel parallel
A V
300 250 ● - - - ● - -
500 - ● - - ● - -
500 300 ● - - - - ● -
600 - ● - - - ● -
600 300 - - ● - ● - -
600 - - - ● ● - -
1000 300 ● - - - - - ●
- - ● - - ● -
600 - ● - - - - ●
2000 300 - - ● - - - ●
600 - - - ● - - ●
(1) from the current of use and the voltage of use depend the connection of contactors.
(2) exclusively via a rectifier (not supplied).
(3) either in 220 V dc or via a capacitors’ discharge of 1300 µF (Voltage of charge: 250 V).
123
Operation and graphic method
42. Co-ordi nation of thyristor‘s prot ections

The DC supplies via thyristors generally have already an rise of the arcing voltage Tma for the corresponding
internal protection system by circuit breakers and an equipment (TA = DA—Tma).
external protection system by a limiting rapid equipment ■ the integral of Joule can then be calculated from the for-
such as a CBTcontactor. It is necessary to check the good mula: 2
co-ordination of both protection systems to avoid the 2 IL (TL + TA)
= ----------------------------------
fusion of the circuit breakers on only external defect that ∫ i dt 3
should be deleted by the limiting equipment. The elements required for applying this formula can be
Therefore, it is necessary to compare the integral of Joule obtained from 2 different methods:
2 ■ graphic method,
∫i dt that the protection equipment allows to the inte- ■ «set of curves» method.
2
gral of Joule ∫i dt required to obtain the fusion of the Both methods will be presented in the next pages with a
circuit breakers. This last value is one of the main charac- corresponding example. Each method will be divided in
teristics of the circuit breakers and can be easily calculated 2 parts:
from the manufacturer‘s ratings, the number of connec- 2
tions in parallel and the drawing achieved. ■ the calculation of ∫i dt ,
■ the calculation of the extra self-induction coil.
This sheet aims at giving a calculation method of the inte-
gral of Joule allowed by the limiting rapid equipment and
the extra self induction coil to schedule whether the co- Graphic method
ordination is not ensured by the design characteristics of
the circuit. During the course of the calculation leading to IL and TL,
it will be necessary to pass from a value of the time to a
Operation of the protection equipment value of the current and vice versa; as the function
i = f (t ) is i = Icc  1 – ξ –  , in shape we have
t
--
The characteristic oscillogram is represented on page 128.  τ
The value of the network voltage U and the value of the looked for a graph that would allow us to obtain a linear
total resistance R determine the asymptotic value of the representation of such a function.
supposed short-circuit current Icc. The value of the self- We can write:
i = Icc  1 – ξ – 
t
induction of the circuit L and the value of that resistance
--
i τ
R determine the time constant t = L/R.
The operation of the limiting protection equipment for in which t i t
-------- = 1 – ξ – -- and 1 – -------- = ξ – --
that circuit can be schematised as follows: Icc i t τ Icc τ
After a certain time TD, the adjustment limit doorstep iD so Log 1
( – --------) = –--
of the current detector DXT is reached. This one, through Icc τ
an electro-mechanical device, provokes the opening of expression which is linear on a semi-logarithmic paper.
the contacts after a certain time DM. The arcing voltage To draw the lines corresponding to different T, you will
appears but a certain time is necessary for the value of the i
arc to be sufficient to provoke the limitation of the short- only have to notice that for t = τ, 1 – -------- = 0.367 (see
Icc
circuit voltage to a value il. This arc will last until the figure page 126).
extinction of the current during a total time ta. To make it clearer, we will take as example:
For a precise calculation of the integral of Joule, the full ■ the switching-off a supposed current Icc of 8400 A,
knowledge of the function i = f(t) during the whole phe- ■ protection doorstep ID adjusted at 600 A,
nomenon is necessary. This can only be undertaken by ■ time constant τ = 15ms ,
using an oscillogram corresponding to all the characteris- ■ equipment used: CBT 400 whose design features are:
tics of the circuit. - DM = 9 ms,
Experience shows that a good approximation could be - Tma = 2 ms,
obtained under normal operating conditions by formulat-
- DA = 10 ms.
ing the following simplifying hypotheses (the drawing
page 128 represents the allure of the phenomenon): 2
■ the value of the limited current iL will be taken from the Circuit breakers can only admit ( ∫ i dt )a as integral of
curve of the supposed current Icc for a time TL corre- Joule of pre-arc value. We will calculate the extra self-
sponding to the summa of TG + DM + Tma (Tma cor- inductive coil required in the circuit not to exceed this
responds to the average time of rise of the arcing voltage restraint value. In the example chosen, this value will be
for different values of current). 2
fixed at 100000 A S .
■ the growth of the current will besupposed as linear from
0 to IL.
■ the decrease in the current will be supposed as linear
from IL to 0.
■ the duration of that decrease will be considered as equal
to a value TA corresponding to the difference between
the average value of the arcing time DA and the time of
124
Method (figure page 126) Exemple (figure page 126)

2
■ calculation of ∫i dt
- representation of the supposed current:
D from the abscissa, draw T on the line 0.367. D from theabscissa, draw τ
D draw the line representative of log 1 – ------- log1 – -------
i t i t
= – -- D draw the line representative of  = – --
 Icc- τ  Icc- τ
from the point 1 of the ordinate 0 – 1 and passing through
the point T drawn on the line 0.367
- determination of TD on that line:
ID D the ordinate of TD is:
D the ordinate of TD is defined by 1 – --------
Icc 1 – 600  = 1 – (0.071) = 0.929
------------
 8400
D the abscissa corresponds to the time TD D the abscissa gives 1.13 ms as time TD
calculation of TL from the formula TL = TD + DM + Tma TL = 1.13 + 9 + 2 = 12.13 ms
- determination of IL on thecharacteristic line for:
D the abscissa TL corresponds to the ordinate whose D abscissa TL = 12.13 ms
IL IL
expression is 1 – -------- D ordinate 1 – -------- = 0.445
Icc Icc
IL
so, -------- = 1 – (0.445) = 0.555
Icc
so, IL = 0.555 x Icc, i.e. 0.555 x 8400 = 4660 A
2
calculation of ∫i dt , by using of theapproaching formula: IL = 4660 , TL = 12.13
2 2 (TL + TA) TA = DA – Tma = 10 – 2 = 8
∫i dt = IL -------------------------
3
2
2 (12, 13 + 8) 2
× -----------------------------= 145000 A S
∫ i dt = 4660 3
The corresponding oscillogram gives the following result:
2 2
IL = 4400 A and ∫ i dt = 134000 A S
■ calculation of the extra-self:
- value of the limited current IL not to exceed:
The change in the time constant will slightly modify the
value of TD but to go on with the calculation, we sup-
pose the total time constant and
2
( ∫ i dt )a 100000
IL2 = IL1 -------------------- IL2 = 4660 × ------------------ = 3860 A
2 145000
( ∫ i dt )1
- value of the new time constant T 2
A line of operation for which TL – TD = DM + Tma and
IL = IL2 has to be found. The slope of such line that ena-
bles to pass from ID to IL in (DM + Tma) ms can be points:
obtained from the following points:
ID ID 600
DA on the ordinate is defined by 1 – -------- D A = 1 – -------- = 1 – ------------ = 1 – (0.071) =0.929
Icc Icc 8400
D B projected from: D B from:
IL2 3860
▲ the ordinate 1 – --------- ▲ the ordinate 1 – ------------ = 1 – (0.46) = 0.54
Icc 8400
▲ the abscissa (DM + Tma)ms ▲ the abscissa 9 + 2 = 11ms
D draw the line passing by A and B
D its intersection point C with the horizontal 0.367 projec- D the intersection point C projected on the abscissa gives
ted on the abscissa axis gives the new value of the circuit 20.5 ms.
time constant.
D as we know the existing characteristics, it is now possi- D the extra self combined with the present characteristics of
ble to determine the characteristics of the extraself the network should allow to obtain that time constant of
(L and R) to obtain that new total time constant of the 20.5 ms.
circuit.
125
 1 – -
 ------ 
Icc
1
0,929
AAA
0,8
0,7
Gra C
.
B
T
0,6
p pidra
0,540
A
h
0,5 B c
o
n
0,445 tac
to
0,4 rs
0,367
C
126
0,3
0,2
0,15
t en ms
0 1,13 5 10 11 12,13 15 20 25 30 35 40
Graphic method by set of curves Method Example

2 2
To make the calculation of IL and ∫i dt
easier, you can pre-determine per equip- ■ calculation of ∫i dt TD ID 600
ment a network of curves that would ena- - calculation of Ie = Ie = = = 300 A
-------- ------ ---------
2 2 2
ble you to obtain quickly the values looked - TD time to reach ID from the parameters:
for form the characteristic parameters of Icc 8400
the circuits. According to the adjustment of D Icc = Kcc short-circuit factor
Kcc = = = 28
-------- -------- ------------
Ie Ie 300
and T, you can determine the value of the TD time to
the protection ID , you can define a cur-
τ
ID
rent of use Ie = -----
2- withstanding nor- reach the adjustment doorstep for the protection
2
mal operation overloads. To characterise TD = τlog 1 – ---------- time TL to reach the limit cur-
this method, we will take the same exam- Kcc
ple as in the graphic method, i.e. switch-off rent IL for a type of protection equipment, the values DM
of a supposed current Icc = 8400 A, and Tma are known and by applying the rule
TL = TD + DM + Tma , you obtain a set of values
protection doorstep ID set on 600 A,
determinig TL
time constant τ
equipment used CBT 400 whose design IL from the parameters Kcc and
limitation factor KL = ------
- for CBT 400 - 800, page 131, τ
icc Kcc = 28 on the abscissa, KL = 0.555 is obtained on
features are: DM = 9ms , T, you can determine the value of the limitation factor KL the ordinate
t
Tma = 2ms and DA = 10ms . by using the formula KL = 1 – ξ – -- and plot the corre-
2
τ
If the value of the integral of Joule ∫ i dt is sponding curves:
superior to the pre-arc one for short-cir- D figure page 129 for CBT200,
D figure page 131 for CBT 400 and 800 allowing the
2
cuits ( ∫i dt ) a, a new time constant has determination of IL:
to be looked for in the circuit. In the exam- IL = KL × Icc IL = KL x Icc = 0.555 x 8400 = 4660 A
2 2
IL
ple chosen: ( ∫ i dt )a = 100000 A S - overcurrent factor: KS = -----from the parameters Kcc
IL Ie
and T and the formula = IL Icc
----- -------- × -------- and
Ie Icc Ie
KS = KL × Kcc , you can determine the values of
the overcurrent factor KS for different combinations of
parameters.
2
- integral of Joule ∫ i dt for a given equipment, the value
of the time TA = DA – Tma is also a known feature
and the approaching value of the integral of Joule
2 2 2 (TL + TA)
∫i dt can be written: ∫i dt # IL -------------------------
3 that can
be expressed in reduced magnitude by
2
1  IL 2 2 1 2 2
-------- (TL + TA)le or ∫ i dt # ---(KS)
3 Ie 3
by considering TT as the total current time and
1 2
K = ---(KS)
Icc
As K is a factor expressed according to Kcc = -------- and
for CBT400 page 132 on theset of curves, τ
Ie Kcc = 28 on the abscissa, and K = 1.6 is obtained on
T, the set of curves page 130 for the CBT 200, page 132 the ordinate
for the CBT 400, page 133 for the CBT 800 gives the fac-
tor K according to Kcc and T
2 2
2
∫i dt = KIe ∫i dt = Kle 2 = 1.6 x 3002 = 144000 A2S
■ calculation of the extra self.
You determine a new factor
K2 K1 ∫i dt ( 100000
K2 = 1.6 x ------------------ = 1.11
= --------------------
2 144000
( ∫ i dt )1
The point K = f (τ – Kcc) in the set of curves, D for CBT 400 on the curves page 132, for
page 130 for CBT 200, page 132 for CBT 400, page 133 Kcc = 28 on the abscissa,
for CBT 800, determines the value of the circuit total time
K = 1.11 on the ordinate, we obtain τ
constant to achieve.
127
I en A
T
Icc

Graph
5000
Time: in ms
IL CBT
il
T1 = TA =
DM + Tma DA - Tma
200 10 12
128
400 11 8
800 11 6
1000
ID
t en ms
5 10 20 25
TD DM ta 15
DA
Tma TA
66. Definition of KL accordi ng to Kcc and T
KL
1
0,9
6 ms
0,8
CBT 200 A
0,7
10 ms
0,6
15 ms
129
0,5
20 ms
0,4
25 ms
30 ms
0,3
35 ms
40 ms
0,2
0,1
6 10 20 30 40 50 Kcc
CBTrapid contactors
CBT200 A
67. Definition of K accordi ng to Kcc and T
10 ms
15 ms
20 ms
25 ms
30 ms
35 ms
40 ms
6 ms
50 Kcc
40
30
20
10
6
3
K
10
130
68. Definition of KL accordi ng toKcc and T
KL
1
0,9
6 ms
0,8
CBT 400 à 800 A

0,7
10 ms
0,6
0,555
15 ms
131
0,5
20 ms
0,4
25 ms
30 ms
0,3
35 ms
40 ms
0,2
0,1
6 10 20 28 30 40 50 Kcc
69. Definition of K accordi ng to Kcc and T
K
10 6 ms
CBT 400 A
10 ms
6
132
5
15 ms
20 ms
3
25 ms
2
30 ms
1,6
35 ms
1,11 40 ms
1
6 10 20 28 30 40 50 Kcc
CBT 800 A
70. Definition of K eaccordi ng to Kcc and T
50 Kcc
10 ms
15 ms
20 ms
25 ms
30 ms
35 ms
40 ms
6 ms
40
30
20
10
6
3
K
10
133
EncombrementsCBT 200 à 800 A
71. CBT 200 - 400 - 800

CBT 200
PC CC AM C
235
147
Ø13
F 201Y O3Z
185
15 E 15 230
AM: mechanical latching with electrical release. E: attachment centre-to-centre distance:

C: closing electromagnet. 1 pole = 375,
CC: auxiliarycontacts. 2 poles = 450.
PC: arc-blowout poles..
CBT 400 - 800 manual control
CC PC AM Dm
160
80
B1
F201Y 03Z
Cs
125
130
Pm
Ca
15 15 C1
E
390
PF
AM: mechanical latching with electrical release. 400 800

Ca: padlocking facility.
CC: auxiliary contacts. E 1 pole 450 450
Cs: safetycontact. 2 poles 550 550
Dm: manual release. B1 132 211
PC: arc-blowout poles. C1 292 330
Pm: manual handle.
134
Overall dimensionsCBT 200 to 800 A
CBT 400 - 800 electrical control
CC PC AM Dm C
160
Cs
80
B1
PF PF
F201Y 03Z
125
130
Pm
Ca
15 15 C1
E
390
PF
AM: mechanical latching with electrical release. 400 800

C: closing electromagnet. E 1 pole 575 575
Ca: padlocking facility.
CC: auxiliary contacts.
2 poles 675 675
Cs: safetycontact. B1 132 211
Dm: manual release. C1 292 330
PC: arc-blowout poles.
Pm: manual handle.
Control circuit drawing(1)
Closing Opening
■ DC supply ■ DC supply, 220 Vdc

RA D
M
CD
C CC
■ AC supply ■ Via detector with insertedcapacitor

RA
M A
}S
C
+
PR
D
—
CC
A: detector can besupplied with 110, 220 or 380 V, 50 or 60 Hz. M: Push-button «on».
C: CBTcontactor. PR: rectifier bridge.
CC: CBT’sauxiliary contacts. RA: auxiliarycontactor.
CD: detector’s contact. S: Shunt connection: 100 mV.
D: tripping coil (1) contactor delivered not cabbled..
135
Magnetic RBC 1054 Z relays
RBC1054 ZA,
RBC1054 ZB,
RBC1054 ZD,
RBC1054 ZBA,
RBC1054 ZBP,
RBC1054 ZCD,
RBC1054 ZCH,
RBC1054 ZCP,
RBC1054 ZDB,
RBC1054 ZDK,
RBC1054 ZBQ,
RBC1054 ZBM,
RBC1054 ZCT,
RBC1054 ZLT,
RBC1054 ZPC.
RBC 1054 Z Relay

Voltage-trigger ed
This equipment can be used as:
- instant voltage-triggered or current-triggered control

relay,
- voltage-triggered, current-triggered or magnetically
delayed on opening of the circuit control relay (delay on
opening 1.2 sec. max.),
- reverse-current relay,
- synchronizing relay,
- regenerative braking control relay.
Type of applications: industries, metros, tramways, travel-

ling cranes…
136
Magnetic RBC1054 Z relays
Technical features
Magnetics DC relays
72. RBC 1054 Z

Use ■ Contacts normally made of copper (silver on request):
This device is used as: -1 contact NO or NC,
■ Instantaneous, voltage-triggered or current-triggered -2 contacts NO or NC,
control relay. -3 contacts 3 NC, 1 NC + 2 NO.
■ Control relay, magnet-controlled time delay on open-
ing of circuit, voltage-triggered or current-triggered. The table below gives number, position and form of con-
■ Reverse-current relay. tacts according to the type of relay.
■ Synchronizing relay. Relay installation is intended for insulated rods 30 x 21 or
■ Regenerative braking control relay. 44 x 24.
Description Relay delivered with 0.25 mm gap plate 0.5 - 0.2 and
RBC 1054 Z relays include: 1.1 plates can be delivered on request.
■ 1 solid magnetic circuit: lower section of armature hinged
if device hasat least 1 arc-blowout contact, upper section The device can be equipped with mechanical latching
if relay has no arc-blowout contacts. with manual release on request..
RBC 1054 ZA Volmétrique

Contacts NO contact NC contact without arc-blowout
Weight
number position Type of relay without arc-blowout with arc-blowout 15 A 2A(2) (kg)
15 A 2A 6 A(1) dry blade
1 central ZA ● - - - - - 2.250
ZCT - ● - - - - 2.250
ZD - - ● - - - 2.750
ZB - - - - ● - 2.250
ZCH - - - - - ● 2.250
2 lateral ZBA ● (3) - - - - - 2.800
ZBM ● - - ● - - 2.800
ZCD - - ● (3) - - - 3.800
ZBQ ● - ● - - - 3.300
3 1 central ZBP ● (3) - - - ● - 3.000
2 lateral ZDB - - - ● (3) ● - 3.000
ZCP ● (3) - - - - ● 3.000
ZDK - - ● (3) - - ● 4.000
Technical features
Operating voltage V 600
NO or NC 15 A without arc- thermal nominal current A 15
blowout current switch-off rating(4) undervoltage V 250 600
resistivecircuit A 1.5 0,6
inductivecircuit A 1 0,4
NO with arc-blowout thermal nominal current A according to arc-blowout coil capacity
current switch-off rating(4)
Standard coils instantaneousvoltage-triggered relays V 92 - 127 - 220 - 250*
Other values and/or 10000 V dielectric delayed voltage-triggered relays V 130 - 250*
strength on request.
instantaneouscurrent-triggered relays A 2 to 8000
delayed current-triggered relays A 100 - 125 - 150 - 200 - 500*
reverse-current relays
shunt coil V 6 - 12 - 16 - 38 - 48 - 60 - 95 - 115 - 167 - 220
seriescoil V 2 - 5 - 10 - 100 - 200 - 320 - 350 - 600 - 900 - 1000 - 2000 - 3500 - 5000
averageconsumption of voltage-triggered coils W 20
min. closing ampere-tums 400
Minimum ratio between closing and opening voltages 1.2
(1) can be equipped with 1-2-3-4-16-25 or 30 A coil.
(2) dry: without penetration, with blade: penetration by bending of blade.
(3) 2 contacts of this type.
(4) for normal settings, special settings may reduce them to a large extent.
* for other values, consult us.
When you order, please let us know:
- the RBC type, name and kind of contacts. - if an arc-blowout coil is to be supplied with the relay,
- the nominal voltage or the nominal current of the clos- please specify its amperage.
ing coil. - if instant or delayed on opening operation is required.
- the closing range and, if necessary, the opening range.
- if the relay has to be equipped with a mechanical latch-
ing with manual release.
137
Operation
Instantaneous control relay: Control relay magnetically delayed

voltage-triggered or current-triggered. on opening of circuit:
voltage-triggered or current-triggered.
The relay coil, connected to the terminals of the circuit to
be controlled, closes the device when the voltage or cur- Same closing and opening characteristics as for instanta-
rent reaches a determined value. neous relays.
■ Closing can occur from 30 % of coil rated voltage or cur-
rent. Delay on opening:
■ Opening can be set at closest to 80 % of closing voltage ■ 0.8 seconds max when trip coil isshort circuited by insert-
or current. ing a series-connected resistor.
■ 1.2 seconds max when relay coil is equipped with a
retarding turn.
Reverse-current relay.
C1 The device includes 2 coils: This resistor RSis calculated to bring the ampere-turns to
■ 1 series coil. the minimum required to hold the relay closed.
R ■ 1 shunt coil. The relay remains closed whilst the current is in the cor-
RS
R1 The relay is closed by its shunt coil R. rect direction, the ampere-turns of coils R and Ra are
C Relay contact R1 closes contactor C. summed.
C Contactor C switches the series coil Ra of the relay into The relay opens, the contactor opens as soon as the cur-
Ra G
the circuit. rent changes direction in generator G.
Contactor C inserts an RSresistance in series with the
shunt coil R of the relay by contact C1.
Synchronizing relay.
M The RBC 1054 Z relay (1 NC contact) equipped with a Contact R1 of the relay closes contact C.
retarding turn is used as synchronizing relay for starting
synchronous motors. The relay coil is set into service by a Contactor C inserts Ex and opens the discharge resistor
Ind
Rd selenium diode. circuit Rd.
On energization of motor M, inductor Ind closed on dis-
charge resistor Rd, a current appears at the terminals of Specify on order:
Rs the assembly Rs (coil + diode) and the relay closes. ■ Voltage at terminals of Rd, motor stopped, to close the
relay.
Current frequency reduces as start-up progresses. ■ Maximum voltage reached during start-up for choice of
C
diode.
Ex When synchronism is reached, the interval between
2 rectified half-waves is sufficient to open the relay.
R1
C
Regenerative braking control relay.
M The device includes a coil with 2 windings in opposition. Closing the relay switches the stator winding into service:
- rotor voltage decreases from 2 VR to VR,
CF R2 They are connected, via a rectifier, one to the terminals of - motor speed falls from normal to 0.
R1
the stator, the other to the terminals of the rotor of
+ motor M. Zero speed corresponds to end of braking and opening
of relay.
R
+ When braking is commanded, rotor voltage is equal to
–
2 VR (VR = normal rotor voltage). BP AF: “Braked stop” push-button.
CF: braking contactors.
R1 - R2: adjustableresistors.
– Relay R must open for voltage 2 VR only. V: electronic locking contact of “Normal run ” contactor.
V BP AF
138
Overall dimensions
Magnetic DC relays
1) ZBD 2) ZCD - ZDK 3) ZBQ

60 51 60 65 60 51
12
B = Ø6 B=Ø5
B = Ø5 B = Ø5
107 (3)
97 (4)
181
84
D
150(1)
PF
(5)
B = Ø5 B=Ø5 B=Ø5 B = Ø5
4) ZB - ZCH 5) ZA - ZCT
B = Ø5 45 45
B = Ø5 D 145 (1)
45 45
D 149 (1)
84
44
159 30
124
75 75
39
PF
B = Ø5 PF
6) ZBA - ZBP - ZCP 7) ZD
PF 12
(2)
B = Ø5 D 150 (1)
B = Ø5
94
178
162
78 T T 84
B = Ø5
B = Ø5 D
51 51 145 (1)
45 45 PF
8) ZBM Attachment
PF (1) approx.
(2) for ZBP and ZCP.
D 150(1) A 90 A (3) for ZDB.
(4) for ZCD and ZBQ.
B = Ø5 (5) for ZDK.
B: terminals.
15 15 D: 18.5 for bar 30 x 21,
Ø=E 22 for bar 44 x 24.
174
80 R T
bar (mm) A B EØ
30 x 21 30 13 9
10 44 x 24 40 18 13
B = Ø5
51 51
139
Overall dimensionsfor900à5000Acurrent-triggeredrelays
DC current-triggered magnetic relays
73. 900 A ZCH relay(2)
5 5 5 5 10 390
25 50 240 50
Ø 14
25
50
1/2 1/2
232
120
35
145 35
74. 1250, 2000, 3500, 5000 A ZCH relay(2)
420
25 50 270
Ø 14
25
(1)
80
10050
1/2 1/2
105
232
72
60
150 35
(1) only for the 5000 A relay.

(2) other forms on request.
Connecting sections
Bars 900/1250/2000 A Bars 3500/5000 A
555 5 5 55 5
140
CIC 1 - 2 DC contactors
Contactors for electrical

trolleys CIC :
CIC 1D,
CIC 1R,
CIC 1DS,
CIC 1RS,
CIC 2D,
CIC 2R,
CIC 2DS,
CIC 2RS.
CIC 2 R
CIC DC contactors: 2 versions of CIC contactors are available:
■ Connecting points that allow a full connection (poles and - contactor version = 1 NO contact,
coil) on the front, making easier the installation of the - reverser version = 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact.
equipments on the trolley. ■ It is possible to add one reverser auxiliary contact without
■ An easy access to all the partssubject to replacement, all any point in common.
located on the front. ■ The contactor closes at 50 % of the nominal voltage
which enables the trolleys to join the recharging point
They are also equipped with: even after a long time of operation.
■ Arc-blowout with permanent magnet device for use
■ A moving element on blades eliminating premature wear under nominal voltages superior to 48 V.
and jamming which allows use of the contactors in cold In that case, it is compulsory to have the fixed NO contact
chamber, without risk of icing the coil core. connected to the pole + of the battery.
■ A moving contact control device providing intentional
sliding of “NO” and “NC” contacts which increases the
reliability of the contactor when the current passes (self-
cleaning) and reduces rebounds (reduced risk of welding
on closing).
141
CIC 1 - 2 DCcontactors
Technical features
Equipement for electrical trolleys
75. CIC 1-2 DCcontactors

Use ■ connection via front.
Device intended to control DC loads, voltage � 110 V ■ 4 versions:
under ambient temperature conditions of 50° C max. - D: 1 main pole without magnetic arc-blowout,
It is specially recommended for: - DS: 1 main pole with magnetic arc-blowout,
■ Equipping electrical vehicles and trolleys: - R: 1 reverser pole without magnetic arc-blowout,
- traction motor (strat-up by short circuiting resistors, - RS: 1 rupturing pole with magnetic arc-blowout.
electrical speed controller), ■ 3 power supply possibilities:
- hydraulic pump motor (direct start-up or by electronic - intermittent service (trolley),
speed controller). - permanent service without power-saving,
■ Distribution by accumulator battery: - permanent service with power-saving.
- coupling, battery charge, ■ rupturing, set of 2 CIC version R or RS(rupturing pole)
- emergency lighting, - installed on support plate,
- passenger car lighting, railways. - upper closing and opening contacts of poles inter-
■ Equipping electrical welding sets (DCside switch-off). connected
Description
■ model element on blades elimininating premature wear
Possible addition of a block of adjustable and jamming allowing use in cold chamber.
auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC, on request. ■ moving contact control device providing intentional slid-
ing of contacts (self-cleaning) and reducing rebound (risk
of welding on closing reduced). a : induced.
■ Ag Cdo contacts.
a b b : inductance.
■ polarised device: + to be connected to upper fixed con-
tact.
Technical features
CIC 1 CIC 2
Operating current (in open air DC_1)
permanent servie A 180 240
trolley service(1) A 250 310
connecting section mm2 35 70
Operating voltage(2) V � 110 � 110
Pole thermal time constant mn 18 18
Operating category: DC_1 to DC_5 class 3 ● ●
Pole current switch-off and switch-on rating
NO contact
version D-R closing A 900 2000
V � 48 opening A 900 1200
version DS-RS closing A 900 2000
V � 96 opening A 900 1200
NC contact
version R closing A 400 550
V � 48 opening A 400 500
version RS closing A 400 550
V � 96 opening A 200 500
Voltage drop at pole mV 37 44
under a current of A 150 200
Maximum operating rate under load operations/hour 300 300
Mechanical endurance millions of operations 3 3
Control circuit: standard rated voltage V 12-24-36-48-72-80-96-100-200
permanent service without power-saving(3)
consumption at rated voltage W 25 32
closing/opening time ms 55/15 75/16
permanent service with power-saving(4)
consumption at rated voltage: inrush/hold W 44/20 53/22
intermittent service: duty factor 50 %(5)
consumption at rated voltage W 44 53
(1) duty factor 50 %, 5 min. open, 5 min. closed.

(2) magnetic arc-blowout by permanent magnet mandatory for opening
under load with V > 48.
(3) allowable voltage 85 to 110 % rated voltage, opening voltage 20 %
rated voltage.
(4) device with auxiliary contact and power-saving resistor allowable voltage
65 to 110 %, opening voltage 22 % rated voltage.
(5) max. cycle 150/150 s, allowable voltage 65 to 110 % rated voltage,
opening voltage 15 % rated voltage.
142
CIC 1 - 2 DCcontactors
Overall dimensions
Equipement for electrical trolleys
CIC 1 CIC 2
57,5
97 71,5
35 18 35
= = = = 18
20,5
25,5
A
B A1
B1
113,5 134
C C
(1)
143 (1) 166
E
E D
D
96 113
96
A: attachment two 5.5 dia. holes. C: coil connection 6.35 Faston lugs.
A1: attachment two 6.5 dia. holes. D: auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC.
B: insulating plate 109 x 58 x 1. E: power-saving resistor.
B1: insulating plate 129 x 71.5 x 1. (1) with auxiliary contacts.
Reverser CIC 1 contactor 1 IReverser CIC 2 contactor
155 146
10 135 116 4 8 130
65 2 75
A 8
10
A
F F
90110 C
C
150166
10
D
37(1
D
2
15(1)
102 3
A: attachment: four 7 dia. holes. F: coupling of NO and NC contacts of reverser pole.

C: coil connection 6.35 Faston lugs. (1) with auxiliary contacts
D: auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC.
Weights (kg) CIC 1 CIC 2

D without arc-blowout 1.100 1.850
R without arc-blowout 1.140 1.850
Complete reverser contactor (2 NC without arc-blowout) 2.500 4.000
Magnetic arc-blowout 0.025 0.045
Auxiliary contact block(1) 0.055 0.055
Power-saving device(2) 0.085 0.085
(1) with support and hardware.

(2) contact block, power-saving resistor and support
143
Connection dra wings
Mechanical Magnetic circuit supplied with

Magnetic latching with Alternating current
Page
circuit Poles for Type and size of manual and Direct current
the contactor rectified
type electrical direct
release power-saved not power-saved not power-saved power-saved
laminated Alternating CBA 55 80 - 150 - 200 without 1 • (2) 145
current single 7 • (8) 146
double 25 • (26) 150
solid Alternating CBPA57 80 - 150 - 200 without (3) • 2 2 145
current single (9) • 8 (18) 8 (18) 146
double (27) • 26 (36) 26 (36) 150
solid Direct CBC57B 80 - 150 - 200 without (3) • 2 2 145
current single (9) • 8 (18) 8 (18) 146
double (27) • 26 (36) 26 (36) 150
laminated Direct CBFC55 80 - 150 - 200 without 1 • (2) 145
current single 7 • (8) 146
double 25 • (26) 150
solid Direct CBC57 80 - 150 • 2 145
current CBC 68 200 • 2 145
CBC96 400 - 630 • • 2 • 145
RUBC96 400 - 630 • 2 145
laminated Alternating CBA 75 400 1 to 4 poles without 1 (3-5) 4 (6) 145
current and 500 - 630 1 to 2 poles single 7 (9-13-17-19-21-23) (11-15) (12-16) (10-14-18-20-22-24) 146
double 25 (27-31-35-37-39-41) (29-33) (30-34) (28-32-36-38-40-42) 150
laminated Alternating CBA 75 500 to 1000 without 3 (5) 4 (6) 145
current > to 2 poles for 500 - 630 single 9 (13-17-19-21-23) (11-15) (12-16) 10 (14-18-20-22-24) 146
double 27 (31-35-37-39-41) (29-33) (30-34) 28 (32-36-38-40-42) 150
laminated Direct CBFC75 400 1 to 4 poles without 1 (3-5) 4 (6) 145
current and 500 - 630 1 to 2 poles single 7 (9-13-17-19-21-23) (11-15) (12-16) (10-14-18-20-22-24) 146
double 25 (27-31-35-37-39-41) (29-33) (30-34) (28-32-36-38-40-42) 150
laminated Direct CBFC75 500 to 1000 without 3 (5) 4 (6) 145
current > to 2 poles for 500 - 630 single 9 (13-17-19-21-23) (11-15) (12-16) 10 (14-18-20-22-24) 146
double 27 (31-35-37-39-41) (29-33) (30-34) 28 (32-36-38-40-42) 150
solid Alternating CBA 71 1250 - 1600 - 2000 without 3 (5) 4 (6) 145
current single 9 (13-17-19-21-23) (11-15) (12-16) 10 (14-18-20-22-24) 146
double 27 (31-35-37-39-41) (29-33) (30-34) 28 (32-36-38-40-42) 150
solid Direct CBC71 1250 - 1600 - 2000 without 3 (5) 4 (6) 145
current single 9 (13-17-19-21-23) (11-15) (12-16) 10 (14-18-20-22-24) 146
double 27 (31-35-37-39-41) (29-33) (30-34) 28 (32-36-38-40-42) 150
solid Alternating CBA 54 2500 - 60 4000 without 3 (5) 4 (6) 145
current single 9 (13-17-19-21-23) (11-15) (12-16) 10 (14-18-20-22-24) 146
double 27 (31-35-37-39-41) (29-33) (30-34) 28 (32-36-38-40-42) 150
solid Direct CBC54 3000 - 60 5000 without 3 (5) 4 (6) 145
current single 9 (13-17-19-21-23) (11-15) (12-16) 10 (14-18-20-22-24) 146
double 27 (31-35-37-39-41) (29-33) (30-34) 28 (32-36-38-40-42) 150
solid Direct CBT200
current
laminated Direct CBT400 & 800
current
solid Direct CEX57 80 - 150 - 200 without • • • 2 2 145
current single • • • 8 (18) 8 (18) 146
double 26 (28) 150
laminated Direct CEX75 400 to 1000 without (3-5) 4 (6) 145
current single (9-13-17-19-21-23) (11-15) (12-16) 10 (14-18-20-22-24) 146
double (27-31-35-37-39-41) (29-33) (30-34) 28 (32-36-38-40-42) 150
solid Direct CEX71 1250 to 2000 without (3-5) 4 (6) 145
current single (9-13-17-19-21-23) (11-15) (12-16) 10 (14-18-20-22-24) 146
double (27-31-35-37-39-41) (29-33) (30-34) 28 (32-36-38-40-42) 150
solid Direct CEX54 3000 - 60 5000 without (3-5) 4 (6) 145
current single (9-13-17-19-21-23) (11-15) (12-16) 10 (14-18-20-22-24) 146
double (27-31-35-37-39-41) (29-33) (30-34) 28 (32-36-38-40-42) 150
• consult us.
(x) x is the n° of the optional connection drawing that can be applied to the contactor. It has to be determi-
ned, when you consult us or when you order.
Bold figures represent the standard type of connection.
Note: All the contactors from 80 to 200 A are delivered not connected.
For the whole range of contactors from 80 to 5000 A:
- overall dimensions are only given for standard connections. In case you wish your contactor to
have other optional connections, please contact our technical department to have its total
dimensions.
We can also supply, for contactors that are not equipped with a mechanical latching with electrical
release, a system installed on a support plate designed to maintain the contactor closed in order to
avoid untimely micro-cuts, please consult our technical department.
144
Connection drawings
76. Control circuit of contactors without mechanical latching with electrical release
AC control voltage, alternating or rectified device DC control voltage
■ Control by pulse switch for range 80 to 200 A, in AC supply for range 400 A -1 to 4 poles, 500/630 A-1 and 2 poles..
◆Drawing n° 1 ◆Drawing n° 2*
R AT R AT RE RAe
M C M C
+ –
C4 C1
C4
2.1 2.2 R/C 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2
■ Control by pulse switch.
◆Drawing n° 3 ◆Drawing n° 4
2 2 R AT
—
RE RAe (7) R AT RE RAe
M 3 3 M
1 1 6 1 1 5 (7) C 44
+ –
+ 5 C 44
C4 C1 C4 C1
2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2
■ Control by pulse switch and auxiliary contactor.
◆Drawing n° 5** ◆Drawing n° 6**
R/C
R AT R AT
M CA + M CA –
Ca 1 Ca 1
2.3 2.4
— 2 2 Ca 3
Ca 2 RE 6
RAe ( 7 )
3 3 Ca 2 1 1 RE 6 RAe (7) C 44 Ca 3
1 1
2.1 2.2 5
+ 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 –
+ C 44
C1 C1
3.1 3.2 3.1 3.2
* in case of direct supply, there are no economy resistor 'RE', no eventual extra
resistor 'Rae' and no insertion contact 'C1'.
** 'CA' relay not supplied.
On request, diode or RC on control circuit.
145
Connection drawings
77. Control circuit of contactors with mechanical latching with single electrical release
■ Control by pulse switch (required pulse time � 0.5 s) for range 80 to 200 A, in AC supply for range 400 A -1 to 4 poles, 500/630 A-1 and 2 poles.
RE RAe
M C M C
+ –
3.1 3.2
C1
De C2 D1 De C2 D1
2.1 2.2 + 2.1 2.2 –

R R
■ Control by pulse switch (required pulse time � 0.5 s)..
— 2 2
RE RAe RE RAe
M (10)
1 1 9 3 3 M 1 1 6 (7) C 44
3.1 3.2 + 8 C 44 + –
C1 3.1 3.2
C1
De De C2
6 6 C2 7 D1 55 2 2 5 D1 33
2.1 2.2 + 2.1 2.2 –

R R
● Drawing n° 11 ● Drawing n° 12
CA CA
C5
M 6 6 11 7
7 + M 1 1 C5 8 4
3.1 3.2 3.1 3.2
V1
4
4 –
– 2 2
C
22 CA3 5
CA1 9 CA2 1 0 5 4
11 Ca1 1 3 12 Ca2 3 3
+ C V2
4
5 5 4 4
D1 D1
De 8 8 C2 1010 99 + De 3 3 C2 6 6 6 7 7
2.1 2.2 2.1 2.2

6
V3
R
* in case of direct supply, there are no economy resistor 'RE', no eventual extra On request, diode or RC on control circuit.
146
Connection drawings
77. Control circuit of contactors with mechanical latching with single electrical release (§1)
■ Control by pulse switch (required pulse time � 0.5 s) and protective device with defect memorisation for the release coil.
— 2 2
RE RAe RE RAe
M 1 1 15 ( 16 ) 3 3 M 1 1 12 (13) C 44
3.1 3.2 + 14 C 4 4 3.1 3.2

C1 C1
De 66 C2 11 RA1 1 2 RA2 13 D1 5 5 + De 22 C2 9 RA110 RA2 11 D1 3 3 –

2.1 2.2 2.1 2.2
R R
A1 A2 A1 A2
RA RA
RD DRA RD 55 RA3 8 DRA 3

77 RA3 1 0 5
VD VD
8 8 RA4 6 6 RA4 7 7
99
CA CA
M 6 6 C5 14 7 7 + M 1 1 12
C5
11 4
3.1 3.2 3.1 3.2
– 2 2
C
4 –
Ca1 5 5
1 1 Ca1 15 Ca2 3 3
22 1 2 Ca2 1 3 Ca3 4
C
+ 5 5 4 4
D1
+ De 33 C2 14 RA115 RA2 6 6 7 7 –
D1
De 88 C2 1 6 RA1 1 7 RA2 10 10 9 9
2.1 2.2
R
2.1 2.2 16 14
R
A1 A2 A1 A2
RA RA
RD 11 11 RA3 1 8 DRA 9 RD 88 RA3 16 DRA 7
VD VD
12 12 RA4 1 3 13 + 9 9 RA4 10 10
On request, diode or RC on control circuit.
147
Connection drawings
■ Control by switch, mechanically delayed contact and auxiliary contactor..
Ctt CA 55 Ctt CA
5 5 10 3 9 4
Ca2 2 2
RE RAe
– 9
RE RAe
14
11 Ca1 12 13 3 3 + 11 Ca1 6 Ca2 7 8 ( 11 ) C 4 –
3.1 3.2 + 11 C 4 4 3.1 3.2
C1 C1
C2 D1 22 C2 1 0 3 3
66 8 7 7 D1
2.1 2.2
– 2.1 2.2 +
Int Int
R R
■ Control by switch delayed auxiliary contactor and protective device with defect memorisation for the release coil.
VD VD
99 RA4 10 10 7 7 RA4 8 8
6 6 C2 11 RA11 2 RA2 13 D1 7 + 22 C2 9 RA1 10 RA2 11 D1 3 –

2.1 2.2 11 2.1 2.2 9 3
A1 A2 A1 A2
RA RA
RD 8 8 RA3 14 DRA 7 RD 6 6 RA3 12 DRA 3
Ctt 5 5 Ctt
5 5 15 CA 3 13 CA 4
R
R
2 2
Ca2
–16 14 RE RAe
1 1 Ca1 1 8 RE 1 9 RAe
(20)
3 3 + 1 1 Ca1 Ca2 1 5 16 ( 17 ) C 4 –
+ 17 C 44
Int
Int C1 C1
3.1 3.2 3.1 3.2
On request, diode or RC on control circuit
148
Connection drawings
■ Control by switch and delayed auxiliary contactor.
66 C2 8 D1 7 7 2 2 C2 6 D1 3 3
+ 2.1 2.2 –
Cat2 2 2
9
RE RAe – RE RAe
11 12 (13)
1 1 Cat1 3 3 1 Cat1 7 Cat2 8 9 ( 1 0 )C 4 –
+ 10 C 4 4
C1 C1
3.1 3.2 3.1 3.2

55 C6 3 + 55 C6 4
1.1 1.2 R 1.1 1.2
R
Int B2 Int B2
A2 A2
A1
A1
Cat
Cat
■ Control by switch, delayed auxiliary contactor and protective device with defect memorisation for the release coil.
VD VD
9 9 RA4 10 10 7 7 RA4 8 8
66 C2 1 1 RA11 2 RA2 13 D1 7 + 2 2 C2 9 RA1

10
RA2 11 D1 3 –
2.1 2.2 2.1 2.2
A1 A2 A1 A2
RA RA
RD 88 RA3 14 DRA 7 RD 66 RA3 12 DRA 3
2 2
Cat2
RE RAe 10
–1 5 13 RE RAe
1 1 Cat1 1 7 18 3 3 + 1 1 Cat1 Cat2 14 15 ( 16 ) C 4 –
+ 16 C 4 4
C1 C1
3.1 3.2 3.1 3.2

C6 3 5 5 C6
5 5 4
1.1 1.2 R 1.1 1.2
R
Int Int B2
A2 B2 A2
A1
A1
Cat
Cat
149
Connection drawings
78. Control circuit of contactors with mechanical latching with double electrical release
■ Control by pulse switch for range 80 to 200 A, in AC supply for range 400 A -1 to 4 poles, 500/630 A-1 and 2 poles.

RE RAe
M C M C
+ –
3.1 3.2
C1
De C2 D1 De C2 D1
+ 2.1 2.2
–
2.1 2.2
C3 D2 C3 D2
R 2.3 2.4
+ R 2.3 2.4 –
Ded Ded
■ Control by pulse switch (required pulse time � 0.5 s).
2 2
–
RE RA RE RAe
M 1 1 12 (13) 3 3 M 1 1 9 ( 10 ) C 4 4
3.1 3.2 + 11 C 4 4 + –
C1 3.1 3.2
C1
De C2 D1 De C2 D1 33
66 10 5 5 22 8
2.1 2.2 + 2.1 2.2

–
7 7 C3 9 D2 8 8 55 C3 7 D2 66
R 2.3 2.4 + R 2.3 2.4 –
Ded Ded
CA C5 CA
C5
M 6 6 14 77 + M 1 1 11 4
3.1 3.2 3.1 3.2
V1 4
– 22
C
4—
1 1 Ca1 16 Ca2 5 5
15 33 2 2 Ca1 1 2 Ca2 1 3 Ca3 4
+ 5 5 C 4 4
V2
D1 D1
De 88 C2 10 10 9 + De 33 C2 6 6 7 7—
9
2.1 2.2 2.1 2.2
V3
R R
D2 D2
11 11 C3 12 12 13 13
+ 88 C3 9 9 10 10 —
2.3 2.4 2.3 2.4

V4
Ded Ded
* in case of direct supply, there are no economy resistor 'RE', no eventual extra On request, diode or RC on control circuit.
150
Connection drawings
78. Control circuit of contactors with mechanical latching with double electrical release (§1)
■ Control by pulse switch (required pulse time � 0.5 s), protective device with defect memorisation for the release coil.
2 2
–
RE RAe RE RAe
M 1 1 22 ( 23 ) 3 3 M 1 1 19 ( 20 ) C 44
+ –
3.1 3.2 + 21 C 4 4 3.1 3.2
C1 C1
De 66 C2 18 RA1 1 9 RA2 20 D1 5 + De 22 C2 16 RA1 17 RA2 18 D1 3
2.1 2.2 2.1 2.2
A1 A2 A1 A2
RA RA
77 RA3 17 DRA 5 55 RA3 15 DRA 3
88 RB3 16 DRB 9 66 RB3 14 DRB 7
RD RD
RB RB
A1 A2 A1 A2
11
R 1010 C3 13
R
14 15 D2 9 + R 88 C3 12 13 D2 7 –
B1 RB2 RB1 RB2
2.3 2.4 Ded 2.3 2.4

Ded VD VD
/ 1111 RA4 12 12 / / 9 9 RA4 10 10 /
RB4 RB4
RB4 RB4

155
Connection drawings
CA CA
C5
M 6 6 18 7 7 + M 1
C5
3.1 3.2 3.1 3.2
– 2 2 4
C
1 1 Ca1 1 9 20 Ca2 3 3 2 Ca1 Ca2 Ca3
C
+ 5 5 4 4
D1
De 88 C2 21 RA122 RA 2 10 D1
10 9 9 + De 3 C2 RA1 RA2 6 7
2.1 2.2 21 2.1 2.2
A1 A2 A1 A2
RA RA
1111 RA3 23 DRA 9 8 RA3 DRA
1212 24 DRB 15 9 RB3 DRB
RD RD
RB RB
R A1 A2 A1 A2
25 15 11
R R
13 13 C3 25 26 14 14 D2 15 + 10 C3 11 D2 12
B1 RB2 RB1 RB2
2.2 2.3 2.3 2.4

Ded Ded
VD VD
1616 RA4 17 17 13 RA4 14
RB4 RB4
■ Control by switch, mechanically delayed contact and auxiliary contactor.
Ctt CA Ctt 9 D1
CA 3 3
5 5 12 3 5 5 10 4
–
8 D2 7 7
RB4 13 Ca2 2 2 RB4
RE RAe
– –
(17) Ca1 Ca2 RE RAe
11 Ca1 15 16 3 + 1 1 11 12 13 (14) C 4 –
3.1 3.2 + 14 C 4 4 3.1 3.2
C1 C1
66 C2 11 D1 7 7 2 2 C2
2.1 2.2 + 2.1 2.2
88 C3 10 D2 9 9 6 6 C3
2.3 2.4 + 2.3 2.4
Int R
Int R
155
Connection drawings
■ Control by switch, delayed auxiliary contactor and protective device with defect memorisation for the release coils.
Ctt CA Ctt CA
5 5 23 3 5 5 20 4
2 2
22 Ca2
RE RAe – RE
23
RAe (24)
11 Ca1 25 26 (27) 3 11 Ca1 21 Ca2 22 C 4
+ –
3.1 3.2 + 24 C 4 4 3.1 3.2
C1 C1
6 6 C2119 RA120 RA2 21 D1 7 + 22 C2 17 RA118 RA2 19 D1 3 –

2.1 2.2 2.1 2.2
A1 A2 A1 A2
RAd RAd
RD 8 8 RA3 18 DRA1 7 RD 66 RA3 16 DRA1 3
9 9 RB3 17 DRB 10 77 RB3 15 DRB 8
RB RB
A1 A2 A1 A2
14 12
R 1111 C22 RB1 15 RB2 16 D2 10 + R
9 9 C22
RB1
13
RB2
14 D2 8 –
2.3 2.4 2.3 2.4
VD VD
/ 1212 RA4 13 13 / / 1010 RA4 11 /
RB4 RB4
RB4 RB4
155
Connection drawings
■ Control by switch and delayed auxiliary contactor.
8 8 C22 10 D2 9 9 6 6 C22 8 D2 7 7
2.3 2.4
+ 2.3 2.4
–
66 C21 D1 7 7 2 2 C21 D1
11 9 3 3
2.1 2.2
+ 2.1 2.2
–
1 2 Cat2 2 2
RE RAe
– RAe
3 3 + Cat2 1 1 RE 12 ( 1 3 )C 4 –
1 1 Cat1 1 4 15 (16) 1 1 Cat1 1 0
3.1
C1
3.2 + 13 C 4 4 3.1 3.2
C1
5 5 C6 3 5 5 C6 4
1.1 1.2 R 1.1 1.2
R
Int B2 Int B2
A2 A2
A1 A1
Cat Cat
RB4 RB4
155
Connection drawings
RB2
11 11 C3 12 RB113 RB2 14 D2 10 + 99
C3
12
RB1
13 14 D2 8 –
2.3 2.4 2.3 2.4
A1 A2 A1 A2
RB RB
RD 99 RB3 15 DRB 10 RD 77 RB3 15 DRB 8
8 8 RA3 16 DRA1 7 66 RA3 16 DRA 3
RAd RA
A1 A2 A1 A2
66
C2
17
RA1
18
RA2
19 D1 7 + 2 2
C2
17 RA118 RA2 19 D1 3 –
2.1 2.2 2.1 2.2
2 0 Cat2 2 2
Cat1 RE RAe Cat1 Cat2 2 1 RE RAe
11 22 23 (24) 3 + 11 20 22 (23) C 4 –
3.1 3.2 21 C 4 4 3.1 3.2
C1 C1
C6 C6
55 3 55 4
1.1 1.2 R 1.1 1.2
R
Int B2 Int B2
A2 A2
A1 A1
Cat Cat
VD VD
/ 1212 RA4
13 13 / / 1010 RA4 11 11 /
RB4 RB4
155
Connection drawings
RB2
11 11 C3 12 RB113 RB2 14 D2 10 + 99
C3
12
RB1
13 14 D2 8 –
2.3 2.4 2.3 2.4
A1 A2 A1 A2
RB RB
RD 99 RB3 15 DRB 10 RD 77 RB3 15 DRB 8
8 8 RA3 16 DRA1 7 66 RA3 16 DRA 3
RAd RA
A1 A2 A1 A2
66
C2
17
RA1
18
RA2
19 D1 7 + 2 2
C2
17 RA118 RA2 19 D1 3 –
2.1 2.2 2.1 2.2
2 0 Cat2 2 2
Cat1 RE RAe Cat1 Cat2 2 1 RE RAe
11 22 23 (24) 3 + 11 20 22 (23) C 4 –
3.1 3.2 21 C 4 4 3.1 3.2
C1 C1
C6 C6
55 3 55 4
1.1 1.2 R 1.1 1.2
R
Int B2 Int B2
A2 A2
A1 A1
Cat Cat
VD VD
/ 1212 RA4
13 13 / / 1010 RA4 11 11 /
RB4 RB4
155
CODIFICATION OF MERSEN
BAR CONTACTORS
Type of contactor:
CBA : AC contactor.
CBPA : AC contactor (solid magnetic circuit for range 80 to 200 A only).
CBC : DC contactor (solid magnetic circuit for ranges 80 to 200 and 1250 to 6200 A).
CBFC: DC contactor (range 80 to 1000 A).
CBT : Rapid contactor.
CEX : Excitation contactor with overlapping of the rup turing pole and closing pole(s).
RUBC : DC contactor with opening pole only.
Generation Overall dimensions :

of the S : specific.
equipment LEN or LER: range 400 to 1000 A.
'B' indicates a Calibre of the equipment :

multipolar 80, 150, 200, 400, 500, (x) D : x is the nomber of D
version, for 630, 800, 1000, 1250, auxiliary contact blocks for
contactors 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 400 to 1000 A.
ranging from 4000, 5000, 5500, 6200.
80 to 200A only.
Nominal Locking possibility :

voltage. V or AV : range 400 to 1000 A.
V : range 80 to 6200 A.
Number of
opening poles
CBA75 400 31 500 D 2 2NOI LEN T

Number of
closing poles
T : Tropical
treatment n°2.
SR (x) : Reinforced blo w-out,
x is the real value of the
arc blo w-out coil (available
only on range 80 to 200 A) 1 code : closing coil supply voltage (1).
2 codes : closing coil supply voltage (1) and release coil voltage.
3 codes: closing coil supply voltage (1) and release coils n°1 & 2 voltages.
Voltage code control circuit :

DC supply
Courant alternatif
A : 48 Vcc,
F : 24 Vcc, L : 24 Vac, R : 380 Vac,
B : 110 Vcc,
G : 380 Vcc, M : 48 Vac, S : 440 Vac,
C : 125/129 Vcc,
H : 440 Vcc, N : 110 Vac, Z : other AC
D : 222/230 Vcc,
K : 500 Vcc, O : 220/230 Vac, voltage.
E : 240/250 Vcc,
X : other DC voltage. P : 240 Vac,
(1) : if the control circuit is rectified and power-saved, this voltage is to be follo wed by 1 for
AC supply and by 2 for DC suppl y.
Number of auxiliary contact type M, (x) NOI + (x)NFI + (x)NOR + (x)NFR + TPA + TPC
(x) : instant closing auxiliary contact.
NOI : instant opening auxiliary contact.
NFI : sligh tly mechanically delayed closing auxiliary contact.
NOR : sligh tly mechanically delayed opening auxiliary contact.
NFR : contact auxiliaire à ouverture légèrement retardé mécaniquement.
TPA : pneumatically delayed block on closing.
TPC : pneumatically delayed block on opening.

FCB Conactor

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FCB Conactor

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FCB Conactor

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Modular contactors

Introduction ……………………………………………………….3 CBA 57 – CBPA 57 B 150A 39 39

M type instant contacts 26 26 CB 2500 to 5000 A and more …………………………………61

Vertical mechanical locking ……………………………. …120

80 to 200 A range 120

CBT rapid contactors ……………………………………. …122

Technical features CBT 200 - 400 - 800 123

Generaliti es on bar contactor‘s main uses

Use under direct current

- voltage from 6 to 220 Vdc - voltage from 220 to 550 Vdc

Mining industries Power generation

Type of contactors adapted to those applications:

C1: excitation contactor.

Traction networks, railways, undergrounds, and

- voltages of 500 - 600 - 750 Vdc

You will find our contactors in the undergrounds of

plat- Section II track I

platform II Section II track II

Use under alternating current

■ Contactor without arc-blow-out:

■ Protection of emergency generating sets

Service Industries ■ UPSunits

Drawing 1 Drawing 2 Drawing 3

Drawing 1: two-pole contactor, parallel connection.

Definition of normalised duty cycles

■ Duty cycles of contactors

Alternating current Direct current

Duty cycle AC_1 Duty cycle DC_1

Three-phase 50/60 Hz motor outputs

Start-up and stop of the motor

Protection against overloads

Protection against short-circuits

Safety cut-offs or emergency stop

Association «contactors - thermal relays - co-ordination type 2 - 50 kA fuses»

Permanent, temporary or intermittent service up to

Adjustment zone Types of fuses

delta connection current (direct) delta connection current (direct)

In case of reverse rotation of the motor and in order to

«Star delta» changeover - Role of the temporisation

Typical values for a start-up by autotr ansformer

direct connection current direct motor torque

Control circuit Operation

"Star" connection "Delta" connection V connection W connection

Factor(1) Ue max. three-phase rotary Ue three-phase rotary voltage

Table of currents of use (ambient temperature inferior or equal to 40°C)

The selections below take a ratio of 2 between the maxi-

Delta CBA with rein-

1 1100 550 CBA

V CBA with rein-

Table of contactor‘s maximum powers of use

Battery power In (A)

Heating elements features

Connection - Control - Protection

4 pole single-phase current connection

How to select contactors from the output controll ed

2 pole single-phase current connection

4 pole single-phase current connection

three-phase current connection

Frame CBA - CBC - 71 - 1250/2000 A type